JP7493281B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that hold a lottery when a certain condition is met, and variably display symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the lottery result is displayed as a specific display result indicating a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. There are gaming machines that are equipped with advantageous game states including a jackpot game state that is controlled when the specific result is a jackpot, and a small jackpot game state that is controlled when the specific result is a small jackpot and that is less profitable for the player than the jackpot game state.

In recent years, gaming machines of this type have been introduced that are equipped with a favorable gaming state in which the time for which the above-mentioned symbols are displayed is shortened (time-saving state), and a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby giving the player a predetermined benefit (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2019-76136A

However, there is also a demand for greater entertainment value in gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming state functions.

Therefore, the present invention aims to solve these problems and provide a gaming machine equipped with a highly entertaining and advantageous gaming state function.

The present invention provides the following gaming machine.
A game board having a game area in which a game medium can roll;
A selection area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A first starting area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A second starting area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state advantageous to a player occurs when a game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area;
a special game display means for displaying a result of the determination by the special game state transition determination means by changing and stopping the indicator;
a game state control means for switching a game state according to a stop display mode of the identification information display means;
A predetermined passage area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
a displacement member that is displaceable between a first state and a second state in which guiding the game medium is more difficult than in the first state;
a displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member from the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the predetermined passing area;
A specific passing area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass.
the selection area is capable of passing the game medium that has passed through the specific passing area to any one of a plurality of areas through which game media pass, including the first start area and the predetermined passing area;
The special game state includes a first game state that is controllable so that a player is likely to be provided with a benefit for a predetermined time period, and a second game state that is controllable so that a player is likely to be provided with a benefit for a time period longer than the predetermined time period,
the special game state transition determination means is more likely to determine that a transition to the first game state will occur upon the game medium passing through the second starting area than to determine that a transition to the first game state will occur upon the game medium passing through the first starting area;
the second starting region is capable of passing the game medium when the game medium is guided by the displacement member being displaced to the first state,
the displacement member is capable of operating in a predetermined displacement pattern when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state,
During a period during which operation according to the predetermined displacement pattern is possible, the second state can be maintained for a longer time than the first state, an operation of changing from the second state to the first state can be executed a plurality of times, the displacement member can be controlled to be in the first state for a period during which at least one game medium can be guided when the operation is executed once, and the specific game triggered by the passage of a game medium into the second starting area can be executed a predetermined number of times when the operation is executed a plurality of times,
When the specific game triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area is played the specified number of times during a period during which an action according to the specified displacement pattern is possible, when the identification information stops in the specific game for the specified number of times, it is possible to indicate the end of the period during which an action according to the specified displacement pattern is possible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a highly entertaining and advantageous gaming state function.

1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a first pachinko game machine. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit of the first pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine; 1 is an example of a game flow of a first pachinko gaming machine. 1 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol in a first pachinko gaming machine, in which (A) is a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a low start, and (B) is a variation pattern table of a special symbol for a high start. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a main control process in a first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 4 is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an initial setting process at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an abnormal state monitoring process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a timing chart of the signal "prize ball information 1" among the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preparation process for opening a large prize opening in a second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in a third pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the third pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, and shows the case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round of play during execution of an extended example of a large prize game control process, showing (A) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. A front view showing an example of the appearance of a game board unit 3010 provided in a fourth pachinko gaming machine. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the main internal structure of the start winning gimmick unit 3150. An explanatory diagram showing the distribution operation of game balls by the distribution device 3506. A front view showing the distribution operation of game balls by the distribution device 3506. This is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the starting winning device unit 3150 when the distribution device 3506 distributes the game balls to the first operating mechanism 3511 side. This is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the starting winning device 3150 when the distribution device 3506 distributes the game balls to the second operating mechanism 3512 side. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. This is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the normal electric device 3146 and the distribution pattern of the distribution device 3506 when the normal pattern lottery is won. This is a time chart showing the state transitions of the normal electric device 3146, the distribution device 3506, the second non-electric device operation switch 3515, the second non-electric device 3441, and the large prize entry port 3131 for a jackpot when a normal prize is won under normal conditions. 13 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of main control processing in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a distribution device control process in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start processing of normal symbols in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an opening pattern setting process in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of game states in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state during a small hit rush in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state at the end of a small hit rush in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a command analysis process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a special symbol game end command is received in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of variant example 1 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of variant example 2 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of variant example 3 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing a game board unit of variant 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of variant example 4 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern determination process in variant 5 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in variant 5 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in variant 5 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in variant 5 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a big win end process in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of play using the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state of variant example 1 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a game board unit relating to variant example 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the special chart change when entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) in variant example 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine, or the special chart change resulting in a two-round normal jackpot. An explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of a game board unit relating to variant example 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. An explanatory diagram showing the configuration and operation of a rotating device 185 relating to variant example 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 7 in variant example 3 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in variant example 5 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in variant 6 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. An explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in variant example 7 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As examples of gaming machines according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko machine is defined as the front direction, the back side of the pachinko machine is defined as the rear direction, the left side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is defined as the left direction, the right side of the pachinko machine when viewed from the front is defined as the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is defined as the up direction, the bottom side of the pachinko machine is defined as the down direction, the clockwise direction when viewed from the front is defined as the rightward direction, and the conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the leftward direction.

The first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine are both so-called type one pachinko gaming machines known as digital pachinko. Of these, the first pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display a first special symbol and a second special symbol in parallel. The second pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine that variably displays only one of the first and second special symbols without variably displaying them in parallel.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, which is a combination of a type 1 gaming machine called a digital pachinko machine and a type 2 gaming machine called a feather mono. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but this specification describes an example in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. However, this is not intended to exclude type 1/2 mixed pachinko gaming machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In this specification, when the term "special design" is used, it means both the first special design and the second special design unless otherwise specified.

In addition, the term "variable display" in this specification includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the pattern is displayed by changing, and "stop display" in which the pattern is displayed by stopping, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display pattern is stopped (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special pattern lottery") and the result of the normal pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal pattern lottery") described later are determined. Note that although the pattern appears to be stopped, there are cases where the pattern is displayed in a state where the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined (for example, a state where it is temporarily stopped), and such a state is included in the variable display. Note that even if the pattern is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined at this point, so the pattern can be displayed again by changing.

In addition, in this specification, when explaining the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine, the case where there are two special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) will be explained as an example. However, for the second pachinko gaming machine and the third pachinko gaming machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. The first pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

[1-1. Appearance]
Fig. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the front right. Fig. 3 is an example of a perspective view of the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed from diagonally above the rear right.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), a payout unit, and a payout unit. 8 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), a board unit 9 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). 160 (see FIG. 2). Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the tray unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the dispensing unit 8 and the base unit 9 will be briefly described. The game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described in detail below. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations that are not shown in FIG.

(Outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a frame body having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to an island facility of an amusement park. A hinge (no reference number) is provided on the front side of, for example, the left end of the outer frame 2, and the base door 3 is supported on this hinge. In this way, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward relative to the outer frame 2 with the hinge as an axis.

The outer frame 2 must be strong to support many components, such as the payout unit 8, board unit 9, display device 7, game board unit 10, glass door 4, and tray unit 5, via the base door 3. On the other hand, there is a demand for larger display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and game board unit 10 to enhance the presentation effect. For this reason, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8 and a base unit 9 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 10 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 3. In addition, hinges (not referenced) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end, for example on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, and the glass door 4 is journaled on the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 5 is journaled on the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end. In this way, the glass door 4 and the plate unit 5 can be rotated forward, either together or individually, relative to the base door 3, with the hinges as an axis.

The launcher 6 is fixedly attached, for example, to the lower right side of the front surface of the base door 3, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to the left and right of the upper side. The speakers 32 output, for example, sound effects of characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio notifications, error notifications, and other sound effects.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite the hinge (i.e., the right end). This locking device has the function of locking the base door 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the protective glass 43 faces a game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10. In this way, when the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front, and game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

The protective glass 43 may be made of multiple pieces of glass (e.g., two pieces) attached with a gap between them, or multiple pieces of glass may be unitized with a gap between them. Furthermore, if the protective glass 43 is unitized, a light guide plate, for example, may be provided between the pieces of glass. The protective glass 43 is not limited to being made of glass, and may be made of, for example, transparent resin.

In addition, an operation unit 66 is provided at the bottom of the glass door 4, which can be operated by, for example, a player to receive a gaming information service (for example, "Unimemo (registered trademark)"). This operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover 45 is provided on the top of the glass door 4, located in front of the speaker 32. A large number of LED groups 46 used for light-emitting effects and the like are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for use in light announcements and light-emitting effects in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects and the like, and may be, for example, liquid crystal or a lamp.

(Dish unit)
The dish unit 5 is a unit consisting of an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52. The dish unit 5 is located at the front lower part of the base door 3, below the glass door 4. As described above, the dish unit 5 is configured to be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, so that, for example, when balls become jammed, an amusement arcade staff member can clear the jam. Note that the dish unit 5 does not necessarily have to have an upper dish 51 and a lower dish 52, and may be configured as an integrated dish.

The upper tray 51 is provided so that game balls can be stored therein, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are launched from the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout outlet 53 and a performance button 54. Game balls to be lent out or paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout outlet 53 to the upper tray 51. The performance button 54 is what is called a "CHANCE button" or "push button". The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to an operation function operated by the player. An example of the predetermined performance function is a function to vibrate or protrude upward based on the result of a process to determine whether a special symbol has been hit. It may also serve the function of the operation unit 66.

The lower tray 52 is primarily intended to store game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 that communicates with the upper tray 51, and game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference number) is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player. When the opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to a ball box placed below the lower tray 52. If a so-called individual machine counting system is installed on each machine, not only is the ball box unnecessary, but the game balls counted by the individual machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be used again for play.

(Launch device)
The launching device 6 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later). The launching device 6 is disposed in the lower right front portion of the base door 3 and below the right of the tray unit 5. The launching device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive unit (not shown), and a launching handle 62.

The panel body 61 is arranged so that when the plate unit 5 is closed relative to the base door 3, the plate unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 appear integrated in appearance.

The launch handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is disposed on the front side of the panel body 61. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 61, and is configured, for example, by a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 62, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

The game balls launched from the launching device 6 located at the lower right of the dish unit 5 roll in an arc along the guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described below) via the launching rail (not shown) and are launched into the game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described below). The location of the launching device 6 is not limited to the lower right of the dish unit 5, but may be the lower left of the dish unit 5. In this case, the launching rail is not necessary, and the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, making it possible to increase versatility.

(Display Device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various effect images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device composed of electroluminescence, or may be a device that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, an effect identification pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) is variably displayed to display the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image according to the result of a hit determination process of a special pattern, an effect image during a big win game state, a demo effect image, an effect image showing the pending status of the variable display of a special pattern, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but the display device 7 may be attached to the base door 3 as long as the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the various performance images described above, but multiple display devices (e.g., two) may be provided and the performance images may be displayed using these multiple display devices.

(Payout unit)
The payout unit 8 (see Figures 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a payout device 82, etc. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see Figures 2 and 3). Game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When a payout condition is met, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied to the ball passage 81 from the storage tank 80, for example, to the upper tray 51. In addition, a power switch 95 is provided on the rear side of the payout unit 8, as shown in Figure 3.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see Figs. 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 9 is provided with a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a sub-control board 92 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) that controls the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply board on which a power supply circuit 450 (see FIG. 6 described below) that supplies power is mounted.

For the sake of convenience, in FIG. 3, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are indicated by reference symbols, but all of these boards are housed in a board case.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 92 may be configured with multiple boards, for example, by making all or part of the display control circuit 304, audio control circuit 305, LED control circuit 306, and role control circuit 307 (all of which are shown in FIG. 6, described below) separate boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 110, a center role 115 located approximately in the center of the game area 105, a first start opening 120, a general winning opening 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric role unit 130, a second start opening 140A, 140B, a normal electric role unit 145, a small win unit 150, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 10. As mentioned above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the gaming area 105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 100 is constructed of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 100 may be constructed of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts of the gaming panel 100 where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be constructed of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 100 may be constructed of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the gaming panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the rear unit can be seen from the front, but the entire gaming panel 100 may be made transparent, or only a portion of it may be made transparent.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number). The play area 105 is defined by the guide rail 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 6 to the upper part of the play area 105.

(Center role)
The center device 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 at its upper portion. Game balls shot toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko gaming machine, the area of the gaming area 105 to the left of the center role 115 is referred to as the left area 106, and the area to the right of the center role 115 is referred to as the right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for the second and third pachinko gaming machines described below.

A game ball launched by the launching device 6 toward the game area 105 flows down the left area 106 or the right area 107. A game ball flowing down the left area 106 or the right area 107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 100. If the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 107.

In this specification, the manner in which the launch handle 62 is operated (hitting style) is referred to as a "left hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left side area 106, and as a "right hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right side area 107. In this way, the player can choose to hit the game ball toward either the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

The center device 115 also has a warp entrance 117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center device 115. The stage 118 is formed below and in front of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game balls can roll left and right. The stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 are configured to be released directly above the first start entrance 120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start entrance 120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 but do not enter the chance entrance 119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 120. Also, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 120 described above, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 120, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach for the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol) are extracted, and the various extracted data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). When the start condition is met, the various stored data are used for the hit determination process for the first special symbol. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting entry of the first special pattern, and various data related to the first special pattern (for example, various random number values such as the random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special pattern, the pattern random number value of the first special pattern, the random number value for determining reach for the first special pattern, and the random number value for selecting effects for the first special pattern) is referred to as the starting information of the first special pattern. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special pattern until the starting conditions are met is referred to as reservation, and the reserved starting information of the first special pattern is also referred to as the "reserved ball of the first special pattern." The same applies to the second special pattern.

(General prize entry)
The general winning openings 122 are arranged in a plurality of locations on the lower left side of the game area 105, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins a general winning opening 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 125 is located in the right area 107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 127 (see Figure 6 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 126.

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbols (e.g., random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are winning) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (e.g., up to four). The stored various data are used in the process of determining whether the normal symbols are winning. Note that even if the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate unit 125, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 125 may also be located in the left area 106 instead of or in addition to the right area 107.

The pass gate 126 may also function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special feature. In other words, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (such as a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the consecutive operation device of the special feature are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, the condition device may be activated but the consecutive operation device may not be activated. Then, assuming that the condition device is activated, the consecutive operation device of the special feature may be activated when a gaming ball passes through the pass gate 126, i.e., when a gaming ball is detected by the pass gate switch 127 (see FIG. 6 described below), thereby transitioning to the jackpot gaming state.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is referred to as a start passing, and various data related to the normal symbol extracted by the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 126 (such as a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol) is referred to as the start information of the normal symbol. In addition, storing the start information of the normal symbol until the start condition is met is referred to as reservation, and the reserved start information of the normal symbol is also referred to as a "reserved ball of the normal symbol."

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning hole 131 for a big winning, a big winning hole count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning hole 131 for a big winning, and a special electric accessory 133. The special electric accessory unit 130 is disposed in the approximately lower right part of the play area 105, below the passing gate unit 125.

The big prize opening 131 for a big win is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big prize opening 131 for a big win, a big prize opening for a big win that can win a game ball hit from the left may be arranged, or a big prize opening for a big win that can win a game ball may be arranged above the center device 115.

The big jackpot winning opening 131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) to enter (pass through) when the machine is controlled to a big jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. When the big jackpot winning opening count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric device 133, i.e., the special electric shutter 134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big prize opening 131 for a big win, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass) through the big prize opening 131 for a big win. The transition from the closed state to the open state of the big prize opening 131 for a big win is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 131 for a big win transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
In this embodiment, the second starting holes 140A and 140B are arranged in the game area 105 as the second starting holes, and both of these second starting holes 140A and 140B are designed so that a game ball hit to the right can win (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win in the second starting hole 140A and/or the second starting hole 140B.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 140A, it is detected by the second start hole switch 141A (see FIG. 6 described below). Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 140B, it is detected by the second start hole switch 141B (see FIG. 6 described below). Regardless of whether the game ball enters the second start hole 140A or 140B, this triggers the process of determining whether the second special symbol has been won.

When the second start port switches 141A, 141B (see FIG. 6 described below) detect the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start port 140A, 140B, the start information of the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held for a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The held start information is used for the winning determination process of the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second start port 140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 140A, 140B is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, two flow paths 107a, 107b are formed on the downstream side of the flow direction of game balls that are hit from the right but do not enter the big winning opening 131 for a big win. Game balls that are hit from the right and do not enter the big winning opening 131 for a big win and flow further downstream are sorted by, for example, the branching nail 108 shown in FIG. 4 to the upper flow path 107a or the lower flow path 107b.

The second starting port 140A is arranged so that game balls sorted into the upper flow path 107a can win, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win. However, it is not essential to configure most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a to win at the second starting port 140A. For example, the configuration may be such that almost no game balls are expected to win at the second starting port 140A, or a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately one-third to one-fifth) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 107a can win. Game balls that flow down the upper flow path 107a but do not win at the second starting port 140A are configured to be discharged outside the machine from the outlet 178.

The second starting hole 140B is positioned so that the game balls distributed to the lower flow path 107b can enter, but details will be given later in the explanation of the normal electric role unit 145.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is disposed on the lower flow path 107b side, and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter (pass through), a switch that detects the entry of the game balls into this winning hole, and the normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 140B, and the switch is the second start hole switch 141B. However, it is not essential that the winning hole is the second start hole 140B, and for example, the first start hole may be the winning hole.

The normal electric device 146 is equipped with a normal power shutter 147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 147. The normal electric device 146, i.e., the normal power shutter 147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the second starting hole 140B or is easy, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting hole 140B or is difficult. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 147 that can move back and forth, a movable member consisting of, for example, a pair of blade members, known as an electric tulip, may be used. Also, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and may include a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, etc.

(Small hit unit)
The small win unit 150 is a unitary body that integrates a large prize opening 151 for small wins, a large prize opening count switch 152 for small wins (see Figure 6 described below) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening 151 for small wins, a small win shutter 153 that can move back and forth, and a small win solenoid 154 that can operate this small win shutter 153.

The small win shutter 153 is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (pass through) the large prize opening 151 for small wins, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 151 for small wins, by moving it back and forth.

When a game ball enters the small win large prize opening 151 when it is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small win large prize opening count switch 152 (see FIG. 6 described below). When a game ball is detected by the small win large prize opening count switch 152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the small win large prize opening 151 is not limited to 10.

The small win unit 150 is located on the lower flow path 107b downstream of the normal electric role unit 145. Therefore, when the second starting port 140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric role 146, even if the small win large prize opening 151 is open, the game ball that flows down the lower flow path 107b will enter the second starting port 140B located upstream before reaching the small win large prize opening 151, making it difficult (or impossible) for the ball to enter the small win large prize opening 151.

In this embodiment, the large prize opening 131 for the large prize and the large prize opening 151 for the small prize are provided separately, but this is not limited to this, and the large prize opening that is opened when the large prize game control process is executed and the large prize opening that is opened when the small prize game control process is executed may be the same large prize opening.

(Outlet)
The outlet 178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 105 but have not won any of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120, the second starting hole 140A, 140B, the big winning hole 131 for big wins, the general winning hole 122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the multiple general winning holes 122 or between the normal electric role unit 145 and the small winning unit 150, so that game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100 as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance-use props 58 such as movable props controlled by a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described later). The group of performance-use props 58 is arranged around the display area of the display device 7. At least one of the props or prop-use prop component members constituting the props among the group of performance-use props 58 functions as a performance-use prop that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is disposed in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10, outside the game area 105 (see Figs. 4 and 5). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display sections are integrated.

Figure 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserved display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, a first special symbol reserved display section 165, and a second special symbol reserved display section 166.

(Normal pattern display section)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol starting conditions") are met, the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b start to alternately turn on and off to start the variable display of the normal symbol. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the normal symbol started, the variable display of the normal symbol stops, and the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b turns off. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a miss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a turns off and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b that indicate the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric role 146, and the normal electric shutter 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, making it easier for the game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 140B.

(Regular pattern reserved display section)
The reserved display unit 162 for normal symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of normal symbols") when the variable display of normal symbols is reserved, and is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above "variable display of normal symbols is reserved" refers to the state from when the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are hit, etc.) are extracted until the start condition of the normal symbols is established. The start condition of the normal symbols is established when at least the following is satisfied: the normal symbols are not being displayed variably, and the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved.

The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of reserved normal symbols by a combination of the on/off state of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved normal symbols is one, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a is lit and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is turned off. When the number of reserved normal symbols is two, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is three, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a flashes and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is four, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b, which indicate the number of reserved normal symbols, is not limited to this.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group 163a consisting of, for example, eight LEDs. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 also includes a second special symbol display LED group 164a consisting of, for example, eight LEDs.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "initiation conditions for the first special pattern") are met, the variable display of the first special pattern is started in which the first special pattern display LED group 163a alternately or mutually turns on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special pattern was started, the variable display of the first special pattern is stopped and the result of the winning determination process for the first special pattern is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the first special symbol display LED group 163a (e.g., eight LEDs) that constitutes the first special symbol display unit 163 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display unit 163 is displayed stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "start condition of the second special pattern") are met, the variable display of the second special pattern is started in which the second special pattern display LED group 164a alternately or mutually turns on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the second special pattern was started, the variable display of the second special pattern is stopped and the result of the winning determination process of the second special pattern is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the second special symbol display LED group 164a (e.g., eight LEDs) that constitutes the second special symbol display unit 164 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display unit 164 is displayed stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reserved display section)
The special pattern reserve display unit displays the number of reserved variable displays of special patterns (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special patterns") when variable displays of special patterns are reserved, and is provided with a first special pattern reserve display unit 165 and a second special pattern reserve display unit 166.

The reserved display unit 165 for the first special symbol displays the number of reserved first special symbols when the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved, and includes reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol. The phrase "the variable display of the first special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the first starting hole 120 is detected and various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as the random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, the pattern random number value of the first special symbol, the random number value for determining the reach of the first special symbol, and the random number value for selecting the performance used when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol) is extracted until the start condition of the first special symbol is established. The start condition of the first special symbol will be described later.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 165 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of the lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is one, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a is lit and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is two, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is three, the first special symbol reserved display LED 165a flashes and the first special symbol reserved display LED 165b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol is four, both the first special symbol reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b flash. However, the display mode of the first special pattern reserved display LEDs 165a and 165b, which indicate the reserved number of first special patterns, is not limited to this.

The reserved display unit 166 for the second special symbol displays the number of reserved second special symbols when the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved, and includes reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b for the second special symbol. The phrase "the variable display of the second special symbol is reserved" refers to the state from when the entry (passage) of the game ball into the second start hole 140A or 140B is detected and various data related to the second special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as the random number value for determining a jackpot for the second special symbol, the pattern random number value of the second special symbol, the random number value for determining the reach of the second special symbol, and the random number value for selecting the performance used when determining the variable pattern of the second special symbol) is extracted until the start condition of the second special symbol is established. The start condition of the second special symbol will be described later.

The second special symbol reserved display unit 166 displays the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is one, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a is lit and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is extinguished. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is two, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is three, the second special symbol reserved display LED 166a flashes and the second special symbol reserved display LED 166b is lit. When the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol is four, both the second special symbol reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b flash. However, the display mode of the second special pattern reserved display LEDs 166a and 166b, which indicate the reserved number of second special patterns, is not limited to this.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processes executed when the power is turned on and processes related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 204, and a backup capacitor 207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 201 is connected to a main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. The main CPU 201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal when necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 200 also includes an I/O port 205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, normal symbol reserved display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, first special symbol reserved display unit 165, second special symbol reserved display unit 166, normal power solenoid 148, special power solenoid 135, and small win solenoid 154 are connected to the main control circuit 200. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170 and error notification monitor 172 are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described below. Note that the setting change code may be displayed as a pattern that is not normally displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 200 is also connected to the first start port switch 121, the second start port switches 141A and 141B, the pass gate switch 127, the big win large prize port count switch 132, the general prize port switch 123, and the small win large prize port count switch 152. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 200 via the I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 184 used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a backup clear switch 176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" does not only mean a case in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key 174 and/or the backup clear switch 176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a role control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in Fig. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the first pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub-CPU 301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of performance reels 58). The reel control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a reel data ROM in which operation patterns are stored, etc.

The reel control circuit 307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 200, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 182. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation) and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.

The power supply circuit 450 is connected to a power switch 95 and other components. The power switch 95 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the first pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is an example of the game flow of the first pachinko game machine. Note that the game flow shown in Fig. 7 is not a control flow but a flow that can be grasped from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is launched by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120, etc.), a payout control process for the game ball is performed. Pachinko games include a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a special symbol is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the starting holes 120, 140A, and 140B, and whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state is determined. In addition, the normal symbol game is, for example, a game in which a hit determination process for a normal symbol is performed based on the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 126, and whether or not to open the winning hole (in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140B) is activated by operating the normal electric role 146. In this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used in a broad sense, and for example, normal symbol games and games with effects that use operation units such as the effect button 54 (see, for example, Figure 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, one special pattern game is defined as the period from when the variable display of the special pattern begins until this variable display ends and the result of the special pattern hit determination process is definitively displayed (derived) (more specifically, until the special pattern determination time has elapsed). However, if the game is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the big hit game state or the small hit game state ends.

When a stop display mode indicating a jackpot in a special symbol game is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the jackpot large prize winning hole 131 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec) by the operation of the special electric device 133, and the possibility of winning in the jackpot large prize winning hole 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, when a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win is output to the normal symbol display unit 161 in a normal symbol game, the normal electric device 146 is activated to open the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140B in this embodiment), and the possibility of winning through the second starting hole 140B, for example, is relatively increased.

The games that can be played in a pachinko game are not limited to special symbol games and normal symbol games, and new games other than these may also be playable.

The following provides an overview of the game flow for special symbol games and regular symbol games.

[1-3-1. Special symbol game]
As shown in Figure 7, the special pattern game mainly includes a special pattern start winning process which is carried out when there is a winning (passing) through the first start port 120 or the second start port 140A, 140B, and a special pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the start conditions for the special pattern.

When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140A, 140B, a special symbol start winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (e.g., various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for a pattern, a random number value for reaching a reach, and a random number value for selecting a performance) are extracted (obtained) from various counters for the special symbol (e.g., a counter for determining a jackpot, a counter for determining a pattern, etc.). Each extracted random number value is reserved as start information. This special symbol start winning process is performed even when the special symbol control process is being executed.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start conditions for the special symbol are met. When the start conditions for the special symbol are met, a special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not there is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol's jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped is determined by referring to the random number value for pattern determination extracted from the special symbol's pattern determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variable flag is on, the probability variable control is executed. In the hit determination process for the special symbol described above, if the probability variable flag is off, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variable flag is on, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as the "jackpot probability."

The high probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not high probability control is executed. When the high probability flag is on, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-shortened game state or a high probability non-time-shortened game state). On the other hand, when the high probability flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time-shortened game state).

Next, a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern) is determined by referencing the random number, the result of the special symbol winning judgment process described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed as described above. Then, a process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, a presentation pattern determination process is then performed to determine the presentation pattern. Then, based on the results of the presentation pattern determination process, presentation control process is performed for display presentation such as decorative symbols and character presentations displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound presentation such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32. The presentation control process is performed by the sub-CPU 301.

Then, when the special symbol variable display control process and presentation control process are completed and a jackpot has been hit, a jackpot game control process is carried out. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-jackpot game state is carried out. In this case, the game state transitions depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is one in which both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to on, the game transitions to a probability variable time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if there is no big win, i.e., if there is a miss, the special symbol game ends. Although not shown in FIG. 7, if there is a small win, a small win game control process is performed.

Then, each time the conditions for starting the special symbol are met, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the start hole 120, 140A, or 140B during the special symbol control process, the special symbol start entry process is executed. In addition, the start information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the start hole 120, 140A, or 140B (for example, various data such as random numbers for determining a jackpot, random numbers for the special symbol, random numbers for reaching a target, and random numbers for selecting effects) is held until the start condition of the special symbol is met.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a maximum of eight pieces of start information for special patterns can be reserved, consisting of four pieces of start information for the first special pattern and four pieces of start information for the second special pattern, but the number of start information for special patterns that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, more start information for the first special pattern may be reserved than start information for the second special pattern, or more start information for the second special pattern may be reserved than start information for the first special pattern.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, between the time when the special symbol enters the starting hole and the time when the starting condition of the special symbol is established, a look-ahead judgment is made to judge the result (whether or not a "jackpot" has been won) and the change pattern prior to the hit judgment process of the special symbol based on the start information extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the start hole 120, 140A, 140B, and a look-ahead performance function may be provided to perform a predetermined performance based on the result of this look-ahead judgment. Note that the look-ahead judgment may be made before or after the start information extracted by the game ball entering the start hole 120, 140A, 140B is reserved.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal pattern game mainly includes a normal pattern start passing process which is carried out when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126, and a normal pattern control process which is carried out based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 126, a normal symbol start passing process is executed. In this normal symbol start passing process, start information for the normal symbol (e.g., a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a hit) is extracted (obtained) from the winning determination counter for the normal symbol, and the extracted start information is reserved.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol has been met. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit judgment random number value extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, executes the normal symbol hit judgment process to determine whether or not the "normal symbol hit" has occurred, and then executes the variation pattern determination process. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process and the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and executes a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and a performance control process that performs a predetermined performance. Note that there are cases where the performance control process is not executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating a "normal winning symbol" has been derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 6). If it is determined that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol winning game control process. In this normal symbol winning game control process, the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4 and FIG. 6) is operated, and the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140B (see FIG. 4)) is opened so that the game ball can enter (pass through) the winning hole or it is easy to open the winning hole. On the other hand, if it is determined that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a game state where the time-saving control is not executed (for example, a normal game state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win will be derived may be set to 0. The time-saving control corresponds to at least one of the following controls: special symbol shortening control, which shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and electric support control, which operates the normal electric role device 146 to increase the frequency with which the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140B in this embodiment) is opened, compared to when the time-saving control is not executed. This time-saving control may be a control that performs both the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control, or a control that performs only one of the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control.

Then, each time the normal symbol start conditions are met, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, the start information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 is held until the start condition of the normal symbol is met.

The variable display of normal symbols will start in the order they were reserved, and when the start conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display will be performed for the earliest reserved start information of the reserved normal symbols.

The method for extracting various random numbers (for example, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the first special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in reach, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the second special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in reach, and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is in reach, etc.) may be a soft random number method that generates random numbers within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 201, or a hard random number method that extracts random numbers from a counter in a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle.

[1-4. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 8 to FIG.

In the first pachinko game machine, a normal game state in which neither the probability variable control nor the time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed, a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is executed but the time-saving control is not executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is not executed but the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 can progress the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed by the control of the main CPU 201 are not limited to these, and it is also possible to prevent any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state from progressing. For example, it is possible to allow the game to progress in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, and not allow the game to progress in the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is recommended in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[1-4-1. Jackpot Probability for Each Setting Value]
8 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (estimate) for each setting value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 8, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 (see Fig. 6) can be used to set one of a number of settings, for example, settings 1 to 6. In the case of such a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting value, and the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol winning judgment process based on the set setting value.

Specifically, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is off and the probability variable control is not executed (for example, in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), regardless of whether the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, is, for example, about 1 in 319 in setting 1, about 1 in 314 in setting 2, about 1 in 309 in setting 3, about 1 in 304 in setting 4, about 1 in 299 in setting 5, and about 1 in 294 in setting 6. Also, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is on and the probability variable control is executed (for example, in the high probability time-saving game state and the high probability non-time-saving game state in this embodiment), is about 1 in 77 in setting 1, about 1 in 76 in setting 2, about 1 in 75 in setting 3, about 1 in 74 in setting 4, about 1 in 73 in setting 5, and about 1 in 72 in setting 6. Although the probability of a small win is not shown in FIG. 8, it may be different depending on the setting value, or it may be a common probability for settings 1 to 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability is different for each setting value, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the jackpot probability may be the same for multiple setting values, such as a common jackpot probability for setting 1 and setting 2, a common jackpot probability for setting 3 and setting 4, and a common jackpot probability for setting 5 and setting 6.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot differs depending on the setting value, but if the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on the setting value, the target that differs depending on the setting value is not necessarily limited to the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a gaming ball enters a specific winning hole, the probability of winning a prize in the specific winning hole may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko gaming machine be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol winning judgment table]
9 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 9 is an example of the case of setting 1 shown in FIG.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the hit determination process for the special symbol, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether it is a "big hit", a "small hit" or a "miss" based on the random number value for hit determination obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140A, 140B. Note that in this embodiment, the only items that can be selected in the hit determination process for the first special symbol are a "big hit" and a "miss". In contrast, the items that can be selected in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are a "big hit", a "small hit" and a "miss". However, a "small hit" may also be included in the items that can be selected in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process for the first special symbol, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. The hit determination table for the first special symbol specifies, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data.

In this specification, when the value of the probability change flag is "0", the probability change flag is off, and when the value of the probability change flag is "1", the probability change flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, a "jackpot," "minor hit," or "miss" is determined based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "minor hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a win is any value between 0 and 204, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and the win/loss determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a win is not any value between 0 and 204, it is determined to be a "miss," and the determination value data is determined to be "miss determination value data."

In addition, if the probability of a win flag is on when the first special symbol is hit and the extracted random number value for determining a win is any value between 0 and 850, it is determined to be a "jackpot" and the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data."In addition, if the probability of a win flag is on when the first special symbol is hit and the extracted random number value for determining a win is not any value between 0 and 850, it is determined to be a "loss" and the determination value data is determined to be "loss determination value data."

Similarly, if the probability of a win is off when the second special symbol is hit and the extracted random number for determining a win is any of 0 to 204, it is determined to be a "jackpot" and the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data". Also, if the probability of a win is off when the second special symbol is hit and the extracted random number for determining a win is any of 205 to 22049, it is determined to be a "small win" and the determination value data is determined to be "small win determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability of a win is off when the second special symbol is hit and the extracted random number for determining a win is not any of 0 to 22049, it is determined to be a "miss" and the determination value data is determined to be "miss determination value data".

In addition, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for the hit determination is any of 0 to 850, it is determined to be a "hit" and the determination value data is determined to be "hit determination value data". In addition, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for the hit determination is any of 851 to 22695, it is determined to be a "small hit" and the determination value data is determined to be "small hit determination value data". In addition, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for the hit determination is not any of 0 to 22695, it is determined to be a "miss" and the determination value data is determined to be "miss determination value data".

[1-4-3. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 10 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "hit symbol selection command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stopped symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140A, 140B and the aforementioned hit/miss determination value data. The "hit symbol selection command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 10, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol, for example, the hit-time selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, "z0" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 2 to 9, "z1" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 10 to 59, "z2" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 60 to 99, "z3" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the hit selection symbol command is not selected, and the symbol designation command "zA3" is selected.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the hit-time selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 29, "z4" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 30 and 59, "z5" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, "z6" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 0 to 99, "z7" is selected as the symbol selection command when a hit occurs, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 executes small win game control processing. In the small win game control processing, for example, the small win shutter 153 (see FIG. 6) is operated to execute control so that the small win large winning opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is in an open state where a game ball can enter (pass through) or can be easily opened, and a prize ball can be paid out.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is "miss," even if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the symbol selection command when hit is not selected, and "zA7" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In this embodiment, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 9) is referenced to determine the hit/lose determination value data based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, and then the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10) is referenced to determine the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, so-called a two-stage lottery is performed, but this is not limited to this. For example, a so-called one-stage lottery may be performed to determine the hit/lose of the special symbol, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Jackpot type determination table]
11 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The jackpot type determination table is referenced when determining the type of jackpot, such as the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variable flag, the number of probability variable times, the value of the time-saving flag, and the number of time-saving times, in response to a winning selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

In this specification, as with the special bonus flag, when the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the time-saving flag is off, and when the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the time-saving flag is on.

In this embodiment, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined as follows. For example, if the hit-time selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the special-hit flag is on, the number of special-hit times is "10,000", and the time-saving flag is off. Also, if the hit-time selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the special-hit flag is on, the number of special-hit times is "10,000", the time-saving flag is on, and the number of time-saving times is "10,000". Also, if the hit-time selection symbol command is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the special-hit flag is on, the number of special-hit times is "10,000", the time-saving flag is on, and the number of time-saving times is "10,000". Furthermore, if the hit-time selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the special-hit flag is off, the time-saving flag is on, and the number of time-saving times is "50".

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined as follows. For example, if the symbol command selected at the time of hit is "z4", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the special rate flag is on, the number of special rate times is "10,000", and the time-saving flag is off. In addition, if the symbol command selected at the time of hit is "z5", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the special rate flag is on, the number of special rate times is "10,000", the time-saving flag is on, and the number of time-saving times is "10,000". In addition, if the symbol command selected at the time of hit is "z6", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the special rate flag is off, the time-saving flag is on, and the number of time-saving times is "50".

However, the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 11 are merely examples and are not limited to these. When the value of the special chance flag is determined to be "0", the number of special chances is not determined, but the number of special chances may be set to "0" in the sense that special chance control is not executed.

The purpose of the "10,000" special bonus count is to allow the special bonus control to continue until a special symbol hit determination process executed in the game state after the end of the special bonus game state determines that a jackpot has occurred (i.e., the next jackpot).

[1-4-5. Special symbol variation pattern table]
12 shows an example of a variation pattern table of the special symbols of the first pachinko game machine, which is (A) a variation pattern table of the special symbols for low start, and (B) a variation pattern table of the special symbols for high start. The "Performance Content" column in FIG. 12 is shown for convenience. The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of the game ball into the second start hole 140A, 140B.

In normal gameplay where left-handed play is recommended, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts shown in FIG. 12(A), for example.

On the other hand, in a game state where right-hand play is recommended, i.e., a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, or a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table of special symbols for high starts shown, for example, in FIG. 12(B).

As shown in Figures 12(A) and (B), the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose), the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for effect selection. However, it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the expected number of times the special symbol will be variably displayed per unit time is greater than when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start. In particular, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long period of time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for only an extremely short period of time, for example, 1,000 msec (for example, super-fast fluctuation).

The main CPU 201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol that is determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in a normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a low start, and in a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, or a low-probability time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to a special symbol fluctuation pattern table for a high start, but this is not limited to the above.

[1-5. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.
[1-5-1. Main control main processing]
Next, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 16. Figures 13 to 16 are flow charts showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption signal is at a high level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at a high level (if S11 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at a high level (if S11 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 (S12). In this processing, a process of saving the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 is performed. In other words, the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this processing, the play permission flag is set to off. After executing the processing of S12, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs a wait process. In this process, the sub-control circuit 300 waits for startup. In this case, the startup wait time (wait period) is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process of S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

In addition, while waiting for the sub-control circuit 300 to start up, the main CPU 201 may perform, for example, checking an interrupt request signal, outputting a WDT when an interrupt request signal occurs, and outputting various sensor initialization signals at predetermined timing.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption before startup (the previous time) was normal or not. In this process, it is determined whether the power interruption was normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was not normal (if S14 returns NO), the main CPU 201 proceeds to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was normal (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then performs a comparison process of the checksum value of the work area (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether the comparison result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the collation result is not abnormal, i.e., is normal (if S17 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the process from S22 onwards will be described later.

On the other hand, if the comparison result is determined to be abnormal, i.e., not normal, in S17 (if S17 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. In other words, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the result is NO. If both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the result is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not OFF, i.e., both are ON (if S18 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. The process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (if S18 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets data for displaying an error to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. This causes a specified LED in the performance display monitor 170 to light up, displaying an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not normal, or if the checksum value of the working area stored in the main RAM 203 does not match the normal value, the first pachinko game machine will not be able to play the game until it is determined that both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on.

Next, the process of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed upon abnormal startup, and is intended to store again the value indicating a setting change. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203 (S22). After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM setting process at startup. In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a work area and address setting) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like. Note that this process is performed both when power is restored after a power outage and when initialization is performed, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initial setting processing. In this processing, the initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Details of the startup initial setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 17. After executing the processing of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt inhibition processing. After executing the processing of S26, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power cut process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S28. Details of the power cut process will be described later with reference to FIG. 18.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the initial random numbers. In this process, the initial random numbers of various random number counters (e.g., random number counters for determining whether a special symbol has won) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether play is permitted. This determination is made based on the value of the play permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that play is not permitted (if S29 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that play is permitted (if S29 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After executing the process of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onward.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor tabulation calculation process. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. This process is also performed using an area separate from (outside) the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the processing of S34, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (if S35 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (if S35 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In this embodiment, within the main control process, an interrupt prohibition section (processing section S26 to S35) of, for example, 6 msec is provided before various processes related to game control (for example, processes S37 to S44) described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control (described below) are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the interrupt prohibition section is three times the interrupt cycle, but this is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the system timer. The system timer is a timer that manages the system period (e.g., 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in a system period management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, payout control command transmission/reception processing is mainly performed. After executing S38, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 19. After executing the processing of S39, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. After executing the processing of S40, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process. In this process, a process for setting the display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (e.g., the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, control of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting of output data, generation of the test firing signal, etc. are performed. Note that the generation of the test firing signal is performed using an area separate from (outside) the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs a port output process. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process. In this process, a launch position determination process, a game abnormality detection determination process, a payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (e.g., right hit or left hit), a launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the process from S26 onwards.

[1-5-2. Initial setting process at startup]
Next, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see Figs. 13 to 16) will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the startup initial setting process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process to load the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating power recovery (if S52 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery (if S52 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, i.e., is a value indicating RAM clear (if S54 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup status flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (if S54 is determined to be YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a setting operation command. The setting operation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described below). After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

[1-5-3. Electrical disconnection processing]
Next, the power cut process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see Figs. 13 to 16) will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if S61 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the power cut processing and returns processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 13 to 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (if S61 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs a process of calculating a checksum value. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the power interruption detection flag value in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, they are stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag. After executing S64, the main CPU 201 executes a RAM access inhibition value setting process (S65). After executing S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until power is cut off.

[1-5-4. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 and Fig. 20 are flow charts showing an example of the special symbol control process executed in S39 during the main control main process (see Figs. 13 to 16) in the first pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S72.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S71, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If the reserved number of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the first special symbol, and if the reserved number of the second special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process for the second special symbol. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. If the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance if the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol. The main special symbol will be explained in the sub-control process described later.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S71.

If it is determined in S72 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S72 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S73. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit judgment processing of the second special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S72.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that it is time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S72 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S74.

In S73, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol management process. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the process of S73, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S74, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S74.

If it is determined in S75 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S75 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S76. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit judgment processing of the first special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S75 that it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S75 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S77.

In S76, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the processing of S76, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S77, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S78.

In S78, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S77.

If it is determined in S78 that it is not time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S78 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S80.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S78 that it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S78 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the second special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the processing of S79, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S80, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S80.

If it is determined in S81 that it is not time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S81 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 13 to 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S81 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 20. After executing the processing of S82, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S71 to S82) within the interruption prohibited area.

In this way, in this embodiment, the special pattern management process described below is executed in the following order of priority: when any process related to the second special pattern is being executed, when any process related to the first special pattern is being executed, when no process related to the second special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started, when no process related to the first special pattern is being executed and variable display can be started.

[1-5-5. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S73, S76, S79, and S82 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19) will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed at S73 or S79 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol is the target of processing, and if the special symbol management process is called and executed at S76 or S82 during the special symbol control process, the first special symbol is the target of processing.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 20 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S91 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S91 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S93. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S93 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S92.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S93 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S94 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to Figures 22 and 23. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S95 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 24 and 25. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S96 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S97 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This process in S98 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

After completing the processes of S93 to S98, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). If the special symbol management process is called in S73 during the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S74; if it is called in S76, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S77; if it is called in S79, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S80; if it is called in S82, the special symbol control process also ends.

[1-5-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S93 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

When the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S93 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S101).

If it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S102, even if S101 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is established), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, i.e., it is on (if S102 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process will end without proceeding.

If it is determined in S102 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., is ON (if S102 is a NO determination), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S102 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S102 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S103, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S104.

In S104, the main CPU 201 performs a process to determine whether the special symbol is a hit. In this process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 6) is referenced, and a hit determination for the special symbol is performed using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the special symbol is a hit, a small hit, or a miss. In the special symbol hit determination process, a process to determine whether the special symbol is a hit or not is first performed, and if this process determines that the special symbol is not a hit, a process to determine whether the special symbol is a small hit is performed, and if this process determines that the special symbol is not a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a miss. After performing the process of S104, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S105.

In S105, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result (e.g., big hit, small hit, or miss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S104). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 10) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command". Note that in this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, if the hit determination process of the special symbol results in a miss, there is no need to determine the stopping symbol. After executing the process of S105, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S106.

In S106, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S105). Note that, although there are multiple types of jackpots in this embodiment, there may be only one type of jackpot. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of jackpots, multiple types of other hits (e.g., small hits) may be provided, or multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S106, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S107.

In S107, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 12), for example, depending on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S104), the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. In this embodiment, in a normal game state in which left hitting is recommended, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for low start (see FIG. 12(A)), and in a game state in which right hitting is recommended (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, a low probability time-saving game state), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special symbol for high start (see FIG. 12(B)). After executing the process of S107, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S108.

In S108, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the change pattern table (see FIG. 12) is referenced, and the change time corresponding to the change pattern determined in the change pattern determination process for the special symbol (S107) is determined as the change time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S109.

In S109, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see S94 in FIG. 20) is performed. After executing the process of S109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S110.

In S110, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process of S110, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S111.

In S111, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 mainly performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S111, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S111) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S112)) within the interruption prohibited section.

[1-5-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 22 and Fig. 23, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S94 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 20) will be described. Fig. 22 and Fig. 23 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the first pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S94 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Also, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S122, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the special pattern pause flag is off based on the special pattern pause flag value loaded in S122.

If it is determined in S123 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S123 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S123 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S95 in FIG. 20) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described below). After executing the process of S125, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the count is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S126, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S127.

In S127, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a small hit.

In S127, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is determined to be not a small hit (if S127 returns a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S129.

On the other hand, in S127, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is determined to be a small hit (if S127 is a YES determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S128.

In S128, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping while the small win game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S128, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S129.

In S129, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a jackpot.

In S129, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is determined to be not a big hit (if S129 returns a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, in S129, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S104 in FIG. 21) is determined to be a jackpot (YES determination in S129), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S130.

In S130, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting while the jackpot game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S130, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S131.

In S131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S131).

If it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (if S131 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variably display ending process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S131 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (if S131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the determined symbol number counter by 1. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss. After executing the process of S133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S134.

In S134, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol being processed (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped as a miss even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process for this other special symbol is a jackpot. After executing the process of S134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 201 executes a process to clear the working area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process of S135, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S136.

In S136, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time on the timer for the other special symbol. In this process, the fixed waiting time is set so that when the special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a miss. After executing the process of S136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2." After executing the process of S137, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S138, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S139.

In S139, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described below). After executing the process of S139, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, if the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol being processed, the result of the hit determination processing for this special symbol (see S104 in FIG. 21) is a jackpot, and the other special symbol is being variable displayed, processing is performed to forcibly change the variable display of the other special symbol to a miss.

[1-5-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S95 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described with reference to Fig. 24 and Fig. 25. Fig. 24 and Fig. 25 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko game machine.

When this special symbol game judgment process is called in S95 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called in S95 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S141).

If it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S141 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S141 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S142.

At S142, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S142 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbols are not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S142 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S143. On the other hand, if it is determined in S142 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S142 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S145.

At S143, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

If it is determined in S143 that the special symbol is not a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is a stop display pattern indicating a miss (if S143 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S143 that a small win has occurred, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S143 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 184 to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing the processing of S145, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S146. Note that the signals output via the external terminal board 184 to, for example, the hall computer 186 or the island computer will be described later.

In S146, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening (for example, the large prize opening 131 for large prizes or the large prize opening 151 for small prizes) to be opened (S147), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 184 (S148), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S150), and a process of reserving the transmission of the large prize start display command (S151). In addition, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S149) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S96 in FIG. 20) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 201 then ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see Figure 20).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S141 to S151) within the interrupt prohibited area.

[1-5-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S144 during the special symbol game determination process (see Figs. 24 and 25) will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game end process in the first pachinko game machine.

First, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S161). In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S161, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for special symbols. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S163). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later). Then, after processing S163, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-10. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 27, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S96 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 20) will be described. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening preparation process is called in S96 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening preparation process is called in S96 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S171).

If it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S171 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S171 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S171 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When a large prize opening control process is being executed, the large prize opening counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds executed in a large prize game state, and when a small prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of times the small prize game control process is executed. The count value of the large prize opening counter (large prize opening counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S173.

In S173, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of times a large prize opening (e.g., the large prize opening 131 for a large prize or the large prize opening 151 for a small prize) has been opened is at the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the large prize opening 131 for a large prize that is opened in a large prize game state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, as shown in the large prize type determination table (see FIG. 11), for example. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 151 for a small prize that is opened in a small prize game state is 1 time, for example.

If it is determined in S173 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S173 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S174.

In S174, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S174), the jackpot end process (see S98 in FIG. 20) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S174, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S175.

In S175, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S176). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described below). Then, after processing S176, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

Returning to S173, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S173 returns NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large prize opening count counter. After executing the process of S177, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to open. In this process, if a large prize game control process is being executed, the large prize opening for large prizes 131 (see FIG. 4) is selected as the large prize opening to open, and if a small prize game control process is being executed, the small prize opening 151 (see FIG. 4) is selected. After executing the process of S178, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 201 performs various settings related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize openings (large prize opening 131 for large prizes, large prize opening 151 for small prizes) are opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize openings, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize openings, the number of winning balls when the large prize openings are opened, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize openings are opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small prize opening 151 is opened when the small prize opening control process is executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize openings are opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize openings are opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S179, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S180.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 5 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, 10 balls for both the large prize opening 131 for a large prize opening for a large prize opening for a small prize opening 151. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S180, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 201 generates opening/closing control data for the large prize openings (large prize opening 131 for large prizes and large prize opening 151 for small prizes). After executing S180, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S181) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S97 in FIG. 20) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S182, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described below). After executing the process of S183, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-11. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 28, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S97 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 20) will be described. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the first pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening control process is called in S97 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening control process is called in S97 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S191).

If it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S191 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S191 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 131 for big wins, large prize opening 151 for small wins) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening entry counter (e.g., the large prize opening count switch 132 for big wins, the large prize opening count switch 152 for small wins (see FIG. 6 for both)) that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening entry counter value counted by the large prize opening entry counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S192 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 131 for large wins, large prize opening 151 for small wins) is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S192 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S193.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 131 for large wins, large prize opening 151 for small wins) is equal to or greater than the maximum number of prizes (if S192 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S194.

In S193, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 131 for large prizes, large prize opening 151 for small prizes) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various settings process related to the large prize openings (see S179 in FIG. 27) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening (large prize opening 131 for large wins, large prize opening 151 for small wins) has not elapsed (if S193 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 20).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S193 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 131 for large wins, large prize opening 151 for small wins) has elapsed (if S193 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 performs a process to close the large prize openings (large prize opening 131 for large wins and large prize opening 151 for small wins). After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S195) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S96 in FIG. 20) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S196, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described below) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S197, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20).

[1-5-12. Big win end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S98 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20) will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

If this jackpot end process is called in S98 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, if this jackpot end process is called in S98 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S201).

If it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S201 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 20), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 19). In this case, it returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S201 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S201 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S202.

In S202, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set or reset, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a number of times the large prize opening has been opened counter, a large prize opening winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. The special symbol pause flag is reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S202). After executing the process of S202, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 26 is performed. After executing the processing of S203, the main CPU 201 ends the big win end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 20), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 19). In this case, as described above, the processing returns to the processing from which the special symbol management processing was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interruption prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interruption prohibited area.

[1-5-13. Normal symbol control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) will be described.

Figure 30 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 30 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for normal symbols is 0 (S211).

If it is determined in S211 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (if S211 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S211 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (if S211 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S212.

In S212, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol (S212). After executing the process of S212, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S213. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S213 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S212.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for the normal symbol. This processing in S213 is performed when the control state number for the normal symbol is "0". If the control state number for the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of the normal symbol. This processing of S214 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs various processing when ending the variable display of the normal symbol. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol gameplay determination process. This S215 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol gameplay determination process, a determination process is performed of the derived result of the normal symbol (e.g., whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss). If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S216.

In S216, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role release process. This S216 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric role release process is performed in a predetermined manner. If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S217.

In S217, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol win end processing. This S217 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol win end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 13 to 16).

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol wins are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 255, and 0 to 255 is used as the normal symbol winning judgment value data. The probability of winning a normal symbol is determined by the number of normal symbol winning judgment value data relative to the total number of random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol wins. For example, in this embodiment, the winning probability of a normal symbol is 255/256. This probability of winning a normal symbol is the same or almost the same when the time-saving control is executed and when the time-saving control is not executed. However, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600 sec, in a game state in which the time-saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example, 1 sec, in a game state in which the time-saving control is executed. In this way, when the time-saving control is executed, the frequency of execution of the normal electric role release process, i.e., the frequency of the game ball entering the second starting hole 140A, 140B, is increased.

[1-5-14. External Maskable Interrupt Processing]
Next, an external maskable interrupt process executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 31. This process is an interrupt process executed in response to an external interrupt request generated, for example, when power is interrupted. Fig. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the external maskable interrupt process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process of saving the protection register (S221). After executing the process of S221, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S222.

In S222, the main CPU 201 reads the state of a specific input port of the I/O port 205. The specific input port is, for example, an input port in which the state of a power interruption detection line, a backup clear switch line, a sensor abnormality detection line, a radio wave sensor line, an open detection line, a magnetic sensor line, a vibration sensor line, a solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. is set. After executing the process of S222, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S223.

In S223, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S223 that a power interruption has not been detected (if S223 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S225. On the other hand, if it is determined in S223 that a power interruption has been detected (if S223 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S224.

In S224, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag that indicates a power outage, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S2224, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S221. After executing the process of S225, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this processing, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt processing.

[1-5-15. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt period of, for example, 2 msec will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a protection register backup process (S231).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S232). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected) (if S232 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S246. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected) (if S232 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 201 performs an interrupt permission process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S234), and the process proceeds to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted based on, for example, the value of the startup control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining whether the startup state when the power is turned on is one of power failure recovery, setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. For example, if power failure recovery is selected, it is determined that play is permitted, and if setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. is selected, it is determined that play is not permitted.

The startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information of the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are off, it is determined that power has been restored; if both the backup clear switch 176 and the setting key 174 are on, it is determined that the settings have been changed; if the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that the settings have been confirmed; and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM has been cleared.

If it is determined in S235 that the game is not permitted (if S235 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S236). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at a 2 msec cycle, and are performed when the game is not permitted, i.e., when the game is not permitted. Details of the setting control process (S236) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the setting control process (S236), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S246.

If play is not permitted (if S235 is judged as NO), it is preferable for the main CPU 201 to prohibit the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 (see FIG. 6), disable various switches except for specific switches (e.g., setting key 174, backup clear switch 176, etc.), and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S235 that play is permitted (if S235 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 201 executes a process to increment the value of the interrupt counter by 1. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited intervals during the main control main process (see Figures 13 to 16), and the count value of the interrupt counter is stored in an interrupt counter area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S237, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S238.

In S238, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S238, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S239. The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203.

In S239, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (such as a random number counter for determining a jackpot for a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S239, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S240.

In S240, the main CPU 201 performs a switch input detection process. Details of this switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S240, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S241.

In S241, the main CPU 201 performs a winning information command setting process. In this process, a transmission reservation process for a performance control command (winning information command) is performed. After executing the process of S241, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S242.

In S242, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that is scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S242, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing S243, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process for the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for game progress is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S244, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S243. After executing the process of S245, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S231, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-5-16. Setting control process]
Next, the setting control process performed in S236 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating a setting change (if S251 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S252). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the setting change process (S252), the main CPU 201 proceeds to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S251 that the value of the start-up control flag does not indicate a setting change (if S251 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S253.

At S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S253 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (if S253 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S254). Details of this setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the setting confirmation processing (S254), the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S255.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating confirmation of the setting, i.e., that the RAM is to be cleared (if S253 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S257.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing S255, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S256.

In S256, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, a command (initialization command, power interruption recovery command, or setting operation command) that has been reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S252), setting confirmation process (S254), or startup initial setting process (S25) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S256, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs a WDT (watchdog timer) output process. In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. Then, after processing of S257, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process, and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-17. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process performed in S252 in the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Note that Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S261). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S261 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (if S261 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S263. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (if S261 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the set value within the range. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S263.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided so that the setting value can be changed by operating this setting switch.

In S263, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 has been turned off (S263).

If it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 has not been turned off (if S263 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if it is determined in S263 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if S263 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. As described above, when this first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S264), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing, and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-18. Setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process performed in S253 in the setting control process (see FIG. 33) will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Note that Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 has been turned off (S271). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S263 in the setting change process described above (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (if S271 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S271 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if S271 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing (S272). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. As described above, when this second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After the second normal game pre-processing (S272) is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 33).

[1-5-19. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 36, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S264 during the setting change processing (see Fig. 34) will be described. Fig. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. Note that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation are not performed in the startup initial setting processing (see Fig. 17), that is, when the RAM is cleared.

The main CPU 201 first performs an initialization RAM setting process (S281). In this process, a clearing process (e.g., construction of a working area and address setting, etc.) of the area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored when power is interrupted (hereinafter referred to as the "backup area") is performed. Note that the area where data is stored in the performance display monitor control process (see S244 in FIG. 32) is not cleared. In addition, in this process, initial data is generated, and the generated initial data is stored in the constructed working area in the main RAM 203. That is, the data backed up when power is interrupted is erased, and it becomes possible to return the game state to the initialized state. Note that, although not shown, in this process, the game state is returned to the initialized state, making it possible to start playing, and the play permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a play permission state. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S281), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving transmission of an initialization command. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a presentation control command transmission process (S256) in the setting control process (see FIG. 33). When the process of S282 is executed, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-processing. When this first normal game pre-processing is ended, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted.

[1-5-20. Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 37, the second normal game pre-processing performed at S272 during the setting confirmation process (see Fig. 35) will be described. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process when the power is restored in the startup initial setting process (see Fig. 17).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process when power is restored (S291). In this process, for example, data stored in the backup area in the main RAM 203 is read, and the read data is stored in the work area in the main RAM 203 that has been constructed. The above data is, for example, various information required to proceed with the game, such as game status information, the on/off state of the hit flags for special and normal symbols, and reserved number information. In other words, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power loss to the work area in the main RAM 203 again, it is possible to return to the same game status as before the power loss. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same game status as before the power loss, and the play permission flag is set to on, resulting in a play permission state. After executing the RAM setting process when power is restored (S291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability of winning is increased or decreased. This process is performed by reading data stored in the working area of the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S292 that the special bonus flag is not on (if S292 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S294.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S292 that the probability of winning is increased (if S292 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 201 sets the high probability variable notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the high probability variable flag when power is restored after the power outage. If the high probability variable notification flag is ON, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a high probability variable notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to know from the outside whether the high probability variable flag is ON or not when power is restored after the power outage. After executing the process of S293, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a power interruption recovery command. The power interruption recovery command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in a performance control command transmission process (S256) during the setting control process (see FIG. 33). After executing the process of S294, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-5-21. Switch input detection process]
Next, the switch input detection process performed in S240 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal state monitoring processing (S301). Details of this abnormal state monitoring processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. After executing the processing of S301, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing the process of S302, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. If the first start port switch 121 and/or the second start port switches 141A, 141B are on, a pending addition command for the start information of the first special symbol and/or the start information of the second special symbol is scheduled for transmission. In this case, for example, if a look-ahead performance is to be executed, a specific pending addition command that can be identified as a pending for which a look-ahead performance is to be executed is transmitted. After executing the process of S303, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 performs a prize ball related switch check process. This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205. If the prize ball related switch is on, a prize ball payout command is scheduled for transmission. After executing the process of S304, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

[1-5-22. Abnormal state monitoring process]
Next, the abnormal state monitoring process performed in S301 in the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38) will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of the abnormal state monitoring process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs abnormal condition monitoring pre-processing (S311). In this process, abnormality detection information (for example, information from various sensors set in the input ports of the I/O port 205) is updated. After executing the process of S311, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S312.

In S312, the main CPU 201 performs a general-purpose abnormality detection judgment process. In this process, a judgment process is performed on each of the multiple monitoring items that are the subject of the abnormality detection judgment to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. After executing the process of S312, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs an induced magnetic field monitoring process. In this process, it is determined whether an induced magnetic field is detected, and if an induced magnetic field is detected, the induced magnetic field detection information flag is set to ON. Then, after processing S313, the main CPU 201 ends the abnormal state monitoring process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 38).

[1-6. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S321). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S322.

In S322, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read process on the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). This process is performed by reading the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S322 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S324.

In S324, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance mode determination process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 generates an animation request including designation information for the performance content, and generates various requests (e.g., a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and a prop request) for operating various performance devices based on the generated animation request. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S325.

In S325, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S326.

In S326, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S327.

In S327, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. Based on the message (LED request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S328.

In S328, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58 (see Figures 1, 2, and 6). When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

In the first pachinko game machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner in parallel, but the sub-CPU 301 selects one of the first and second special symbols as the main special symbol and the other as the sub-special symbol, and mainly controls the presentation of the main special symbol. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state in which left-handed play is recommended, and the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the game state in which right-handed play is recommended (high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state). The sub-CPU 301 then performs variable display of decorative symbols for the main special symbol, display presentation of characters, etc., and audio presentation of the main special symbol. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub-special symbol is, for example, a jackpot, the presentation of the main special symbol may be performed while the presentation of the sub-special symbol is performed.

[1-7. Small Hit Rush]
In the first pachinko gaming machine described above, a so-called small win rush can be realized. The small win rush will be described below.

As described above, the first pachinko game machine has a normal game state, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, and a low-probability time-saving game state, and the main CPU 201 controls the game state to one of these game states. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is recommended, so the first special symbol game based on the game ball entering the first start hole 120 is mainly played. In the other game states (high-probability time-saving game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state, and low-probability time-saving game state), right-handed hitting is recommended, so the second special symbol game based on the game ball entering the second start hole 140A, 140B is mainly played. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 145 is the first starting hole, the first special symbol game is primarily executed in any one of the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state, and the second special symbol game is primarily executed in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-limited game state, the frequency with which game balls enter the large prize opening 151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (e.g., normal game state, high-probability time-limited game state, low-probability time-limited game state), resulting in a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of winning balls, etc.) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the mechanism of the small win rush will be described. First, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 126. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, the electric support control that operates the normal electric device 146 to increase the frequency of opening the winning port (for example, the second start port 140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, the big win large winning port 131 will not be in an open state unless the big win game control process is executed, so the frequency of the second start port 140B being in an open state in the high probability non-time-saving game state is lower than in the game state in which the time-saving control is executed. Therefore, if the small win large winning port 151 is open, the game ball hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 107b can win the small win large winning port 151. When the game ball wins the small win large winning port 151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 107a can enter the second start port 140A. When a game ball enters the second start port 140A, 140B, not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the hit determination table for special symbols (see FIG. 9), but also a super-fast fluctuation (for example, variable display time 1000 msec) is executed as shown in the fluctuation pattern table for special symbols for high start (see FIG. 12 (B)), so that the frequency of game balls entering the large winning port 151 for small wins is increased compared to other game states (for example, normal game state, high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of winning balls, etc.) paid out for the number of shot balls per unit time can exceed 1.

On the other hand, in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), the second start port 140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 107b enter the second start port 140B. Therefore, even if the small win large winning port 151 is open, the expectation of a game ball entering the small win large winning port 151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second start port 140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 107a enters the second starting port 140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 107a enter the second starting port 140A. In this way, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (e.g., the number of prize balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, left-handed shots are recommended, but if right-handed shots are performed, the normal electric device 146 will be activated when the game ball shot to the right passes through the passing gate 126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal pattern win is derived, and the game ball will enter the second start port 140B, which may open the large winning port 151 for small wins. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special pattern for low start (see FIG. 12 (A)), so even if the game ball enters the second start port 140A, 140B, the variable display of the second special pattern will be performed in one of the long variations A to C, which have extremely long variation times, and the frequency with which the large winning port 151 for small wins is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 145 is the first starting hole, the probability of winning a normal symbol in normal play mode may be set to 0, for example, so that there is no practical benefit to hitting to the right.

In this embodiment, the small win rush occurs in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win rush may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol without executing electric support control.

[1-8. Signals output to outside the device]
Next, a signal output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer (not shown) provided on each island) will be described. Note that, in this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described, but it is also possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, various signals such as "prize ball information 1," "door/frame open," "external information 1" to "external information 8," "prize ball information 2," and "security." However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or the machine may be configured so that none of these signals are output.

Figure 41 is a table showing an example of the output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Figure 41, a "prize ball information 1" signal is output from CN1, a "door/frame open" signal is output from CH2, signals for "external information 1" to "external information 8" are output from CH3 to CH10 respectively, a "prize ball information 2" signal is output from CH11, and a "security" signal is output from CH12. The output conditions for signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in Figure 41.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the "prize ball information 1" signal as an example. As shown in Figure 41, in this embodiment, the "prize ball information 1" signal is output for 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out.

Figure 42 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal, one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 42, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time a prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening (large prize opening 131 for a big win or large prize opening 151 for a small win (see FIG. 4 for both), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, when a game ball enters the start opening (first start opening 120 or second start opening 140A (see FIG. 4 for both), for example, 3 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the general prize opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, 4 prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" for, for example, 120 msec, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the signal "prize ball information 1". Note that outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is merely an example, and it may be any time between when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on and when it is turned off. Also, outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" each time 10 prize balls are paid out or for 120 msec is merely an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal "prize ball information 1" can be set appropriately.

Next, we will explain an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside. The "security" signal is a signal that is mainly output when an error occurs.

Figure 43 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the table shows the trigger for the error in the main control circuit 200, the trigger for the error to be released in the main control circuit 200 (see Figure 6), the output time of the "security" signal (shown as "security signal" in Figure 43), and any notes.

The outline of the errors shown in FIG. 43 is an example, and only some of them may be judged to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 43 may be judged to be errors. Examples of errors that are judged to be errors that are not shown in FIG. 43 include a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined time or more, a large prize entry/emission abnormality error when there are undischarged game balls inside the large prize entry port (large prize entry port 131 for large prizes or large prize entry port 151 for small prizes (see FIG. 4 for both)) or when a prize is won inside the large prize entry port when the large prize entry port is not open, and a vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor is on for a predetermined time. In addition, for example, if a specific area is provided within the jackpot large prize opening 131, and the special probability control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, it is preferable to configure it so that an error is determined when there is an abnormal passage to the specific area, or when the game ball passes through the specific area even though there are no game balls yet to be discharged inside the jackpot large prize opening 131.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub-CPU 301, which receives the fraud detection-related command, executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The following briefly explains the control by the main CPU 201 and sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6 for both), using the example of an abnormal winning error at the big win slot.

As shown in FIG. 43, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning is detected before the first big win opening 131 (see FIG. 4) is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. It also sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the type of error, so that an external device (e.g., hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or island computer (not shown)) can know that an error has occurred by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot know the content of the error. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output time of the "security" signal may be changed depending on the content of the error, so that an external device that receives the "security" signal can know the content of the error.

When the sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, an abnormal winning error at the large winning port for a jackpot, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and when, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, it terminates the notification control shown below.
Notification control for displaying, for example, the text "Abnormal winning error at large prize port" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control to output a voice such as "There is an abnormal winning error at the large prize port" from a speaker (see, for example, Figure 6 for both) via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep from a speaker via a voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for lighting up all of the LEDs 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) in red via the LED control circuit 306.

If a power outage occurs, for example, before 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, the sub-CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port, it will re-execute the above-mentioned notification control.

Next, the signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a table showing an example of signals output from the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming status. In FIG. 44, signals that are output are indicated by a circle, and signals that are not output are indicated by an x.

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the signals output vary depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during normal gameplay (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special mode or time-saving mode), no signals are output, during low-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 7" are output, during high-probability time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3", "External Information 5", and "External Information 7" are output, and during high-probability non-time-saving gameplay (other than during a big win or small win), the signals "External Information 3" and "External Information 6" are output.

In this way, by outputting different signals depending on the game status controlled by the main CPU 201, devices outside the machine that can receive the signals (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko game machine to which the external information is sent.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the normal game state) is the same as the signal output during the normal game state (other than during a big win or small win, other than during a special mode or time-saving mode). Similarly, the signal output during the small win game control process (in the low-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win), and the signal output during the small win game control process (in the high-probability non-time-saving game state) is the same as the signal output during the high-probability non-time-saving game state (other than during a big win or small win). In other words, an external device capable of receiving the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) cannot know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine to which the external information is sent. However, instead of this, the signal output during the small win game control process may be made different from the signal output when the small win game control process is not being executed, so that the external device capable of receiving the signal can know whether or not the small win game control process is being executed in the pachinko game machine to which the external information is sent.

Also, during the low-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during the high-probability time-saving game state (other than during a big win or a small win), during small win game control processing (low-probability time-saving game state), and during small win game control processing (high-probability time-saving game state) shown in FIG. 44, the signal is output during execution of time-saving control. In this case, it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when both the electric support control and the special chart shortening control are being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the electric support control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed, or it may be considered that the time-saving control is being executed when only the special chart shortening control of the electric support control and the special chart shortening control is being executed.

[2. The second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be described. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine called digital pachinko. However, the second pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following explanation of the second pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 1184 (see Figure 46) to the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 1186 (see Figure 46) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In addition, when describing the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, when describing the configuration with reference to new drawings adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine.

Incidentally, pachinko gaming machines in which the first and second special symbols are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed, include pachinko gaming machines in which, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are on hold, the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine"), and pachinko gaming machines in which the start conditions are established in the order of winning, including the first and second start ports (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine").

In a priority variable play machine, the start conditions for the first special pattern are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special pattern is being variable displayed, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special pattern is not on hold, and the variable display of the first special pattern is on hold. The start conditions for the second special pattern are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special pattern is being variable displayed, the game is not in a jackpot game state, and the variable display of the second special pattern is on hold.

In addition, in a sequential variable machine, the start condition for the first special symbol is met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the first special symbol. The start condition for the second special symbol is met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the second special symbol.

The following explains using a priority variable machine as an example.

[2-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 1010 of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 45. This game board unit 1010 is also disposed behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) in the same manner as the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine. A game area 1105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 1010, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 1120, etc.) arranged in the play area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine, but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 45, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 1110, a center role 1115 located approximately in the center of the game area 1105, a first start opening 1120, a general winning opening 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric role unit 1130, a second start opening 1140, a normal electric role unit 1145, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 in the first pachinko game machine, and a description of the LED unit 1160 in the second pachinko game machine will be omitted.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. A guide rail 1110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted thereon. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the gaming area 1105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 1105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 1100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 1100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 1100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number) similar to the first pachinko game machine. The play area 1105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 1006 (see FIG. 46 described later) to the upper part of the play area 1105.

(Center role)
The center device 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 1006 toward the game area 1105 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107. A game ball flowing down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 1100. If the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 1106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figure 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 1107.

The center device 1115 also has a warp entrance 1117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 1106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 are configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed in the center device 1115. The stage 1118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 1007 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 1119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 1118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 1120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 1120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 1117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 but do not enter the chance entrance 1119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 1120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 1007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 1120. Also, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 46 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 1120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are held. When the start conditions are met, the held start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 1120 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
A plurality of general winning openings 1122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 46 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 1122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 1122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 1125 is a unit body that integrates a passing gate 1126 that is arranged in the right area 1107 and is configured so that a game ball hit from the right can pass through, and a passing gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 46 described later) that detects the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126, and is arranged in the right area 1107 and is configured so that a game ball hit from the right can pass through. When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 1126 is detected, starting information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved various data are used for the winning judgment process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passing of the game ball to the passing gate unit 1125, the prize ball is not paid out. The passing gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left area 1106 instead of or in addition to the right area 1107.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning hole 1131, a count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning hole 1131, and a special electric accessory 1133. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The large prize opening 1131 is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 1131 described above, a large prize opening that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a large prize opening that can win game balls may be arranged above the center gimmick 1115.

The large prize opening 1131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 46 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 (see FIG. 46 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 1134. The special electric device 1133, i.e., the special electric shutter 1134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 1131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 1131. In addition, in the big win game state, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the large prize opening 1131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 1140 is disposed in the left area 1106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 1120). However, the second starting hole 1140 is configured so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win, for example, due to a game pin, and the game ball hit to the right is guided to the vicinity of the second starting hole 1140 so that it can win. However, it is not essential to configure the second starting hole 1140 in this way, and it may be provided in the right area 1107 so that, for example, a game ball hit to the right can win. The second starting hole 1140 may also be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 1140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later). When the second start hole switch 1141 (see FIG. 46 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 1140, start information for the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). When the start condition is met, the reserved start information is used for the winning determination process for the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start hole 1140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second start hole 1140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 1140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is disposed in the left area 1106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 1120), and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and the normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second starting hole 1140, and the switch is the second starting hole switch 1141.

The normal electric device 1146 comprises a normal power movable member 1147, also known as an electric chute, and a normal power solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 46 described below) that operates the normal power movable member 1147. The normal electric device 1146, i.e., the normal power movable member 1147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 1140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 1140. Note that instead of the normal power movable member 1147, also known as an electric chute, a shutter that can move back and forth, for example, may be used.

(Outlet)
The outlet 1178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 1105 but have not won any of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 1120, the second starting hole 1140, the big winning hole 1131, and the general winning hole 1122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 1178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 1105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning holes 1122, so that game balls flowing down the game area 1105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 1010, as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 1007, and is equipped with a group of performance-use accessories 1058, such as movable accessories, controlled by the sub-control circuit 1300. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 1058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the second pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but they will be described in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 46, the second pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 1400, and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 1201 is connected to the main ROM 1202, the main RAM 1203, the initial reset circuit 1204, etc. The main CPU 1201 has built-in functions such as a WDT that monitors operation and a function to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 1201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 has a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 1203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201, this is not limited to this, and any readable and writable storage medium can be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 1200 also includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 1300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 1165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 1166, the normal power solenoid 1148, and the special power solenoid 1135. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 1170 and the error notification monitor 1172. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the proportion of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 1172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the error notification monitor 1172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a pattern that is not normally displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the first start port switch 1121, the second start port switch 1141, the pass gate switch 1127, the count switch 1132, and the general winning port switch 1123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 1200 via the I/O port 1205.

The main control circuit 1200 is further connected to a calling device (not shown) that has functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 1184 used to send data to a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key 1174 that is operated to change or check the setting value if the pachinko machine has a setting function, and a backup clear switch 1176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. Note that if the pachinko machine has a setting function, the backup clear switch 1176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided.

The setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the amusement facility. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176, so that the manager of the amusement facility can touch the setting key 1174 and/or the backup clear switch 1176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the amusement facility to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 1400 or the power supply circuit 1450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the person in charge of the amusement facility from easily touching the setting key 1174 or the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 1300 includes a sub-CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, a sound control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, a role control circuit 1307, and a command input port 1308. The sub-control circuit 1300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 46, like the first pachinko game machine, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the second pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 1301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 1301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. In response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub-CPU 1301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 1058). The reel control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 1307 selects one operation pattern from among the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied, thereby controlling the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from among the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 1301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied, thereby controlling the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 1308 is connected to the command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 1082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 1006 for launching game balls, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 1200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 1180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 1182. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

The power supply circuit 1450 is connected to a power switch 1095 and other components. The power switch 1095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 47 to 50. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

The second pachinko game machine is provided with a normal game state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-probability time-saving game state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a low-probability time-saving game state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 1201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in normal game mode, and right-handed hitting is recommended in high-probability time-saving game mode and low-probability time-saving game mode. The sub-CPU 1301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method, for example, in the display area of the display device 1007.

[2-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 47 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the winning judgment process for the special symbol, that is, a table referenced when determining a "jackpot" or a "miss" by lottery based on the random number value for jackpot judgment obtained when a gaming ball enters the starting hole 1120, 1140. Note that in this embodiment, the only lottery objects are "jackpots" and "misses," and other lottery objects (e.g., small wins) are not included, but other lottery objects may be determined when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 1120 and/or the second starting hole 1140.

As described above, the random number value for determining a jackpot is a random number value used in the process of determining whether or not a special symbol has won. In this embodiment, the random number value for determining a jackpot is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the hit determination process for the special symbol, a "hit" or "miss" is determined based on the extracted random number for hit determination. In the hit determination table for the special symbol, for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number for hit determination that is determined to be a "hit" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number for hit determination that is determined to be a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first or second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for the hit determination is any value between 0 and 204, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." On the other hand, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first or second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for the hit determination is any value between 0 and 204, it is determined to be a "miss," and the determination value data is determined to be "miss determination value data."

In addition, if the probability of a win flag is on during the hit determination process for the first or second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a win is any value between 0 and 935, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and the determination value data is determined to be "jackpot determination value data." On the other hand, if the probability of a win flag is on during the hit determination process for the first or second special symbol, and the extracted random number value for determining a win is not any value between 0 and 935, it is determined to be a "miss," and the determination value data is determined to be "miss determination value data."

[2-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 48 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "hit symbol selection command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the start hole 1120, 1140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "hit symbol selection command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 48, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the hit-time selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 9, "z0" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, "z1" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, "z2" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the hit selection symbol command is not selected, and the symbol designation command "zA3" is selected.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the hit-time selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 59, "z3" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, "z4" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the winning judgment process for the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the winning symbol selection command is not selected, and the symbol designation command "zA5" is selected.

[2-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
49 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 of the second pachinko game machine. The jackpot type determination table is referenced when determining the type of jackpot, such as the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the probability variable flag, the value of the time-saving flag, the number of probability variable times, and the number of time-saving times, in accordance with the hit-time selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined as follows. For example, if the symbol command selected at the time of hit is "z0", the number of rounds is determined to be "10", the value of the special flag is "1", the number of special times is "10000", the value of the time-saving flag is "1", and the number of time-saving times is "10000". Also, if the symbol command selected at the time of hit is "z1", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the value of the special flag is "1", the number of special times is "10000", the value of the time-saving flag is "1", and the number of time-saving times is "10000". Also, if the symbol command selected at the time of hit is "z2", the number of rounds is determined to be "4", the value of the special flag is "0", the value of the time-saving flag is "1", and the number of time-saving times is "50".

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the type of jackpot is determined as follows. For example, if the symbol command selected at the time of hit is "z3," the number of rounds is determined to be "10," the value of the special probability flag is determined to be "1," the number of special probability times is determined to be "10,000," the value of the time-saving flag is determined to be "1," and the number of time-saving times is determined to be "10,000."In addition, if the symbol command selected at the time of hit is "z4," the number of rounds is determined to be "10," the value of the special probability flag is determined to be "0," the value of the time-saving flag is determined to be "1," and the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50."

However, the types of jackpots shown in FIG. 49 are just examples and are not limited to these. As mentioned above, when the value of the special chance flag is determined to be "0", the number of special chances is not set, but the number of special chances may be set to "0" in the sense that special chance control is not executed.

The time-saving flag, like the probability change flag, is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 1203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time-saving control. When in a time-saving game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), the time-saving flag is set to on, and when in a game state in which time-saving control is not executed (for example, in this embodiment, a normal game state), the time-saving flag is set to off.

The number of time-saving times is the number of times that the special symbols can be displayed variably while the time-saving control can be continued. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50," when 50 times of variable display of special symbols are performed without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and transitions to a non-time-saving game state (for example, the normal game state in this embodiment).

As mentioned above, the purpose of the "10,000" number of times for the special bonus is to allow the special bonus control to continue until a jackpot is determined to have occurred in the special symbol hit determination process executed in the game state after the jackpot game state ends (i.e., the next jackpot). Similarly, the purpose of the "10,000" number of times for the time-saving feature is to allow the time-saving control to continue until the next jackpot.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
Fig. 50 is an example of a variation pattern table of the special symbols of the second pachinko game machine. The "Performance Content" column in Fig. 50 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 1201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 1120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 1140.

As shown in FIG. 50, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, and/or the random number value for performance selection, but is not limited to this and may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is sent from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 1308 of the sub-CPU 1301 via the command output port 1206. The sub-CPU 1301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information sent from the main CPU 1201.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the same as those in the first pachinko game machine, except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 13 to 16). Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and the other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted. Note that, although the processes executed in the special symbol control process in the second pachinko game machine include the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (for example, the jackpot end process (Figs. 29 and 59)), the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine will be described below with different step numbers.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process carried out in the main control process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 1201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 1203, etc., in a specified register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later). Then, when the sub-control circuit 1300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 1301 performs a demo display performance. Note that the second pachinko game machine is not a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and therefore does not have the concept of a main special symbol as described in the first pachinko game machine.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S1001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S1002 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S1002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1003.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S1003 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S1003 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S1004 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 13 to 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1004 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S1004 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1005.

Returning to S1003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S1003 returns YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. After executing the processing of S1003, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S1001 to S1005) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the second pachinko gaming machine has been described as a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is reserved, but this is not limited to this. For example, the second pachinko gaming machine may be a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process (S1005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern when the start information of the first special pattern is reserved, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 1120 or the second start port 1140.

[2-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51) will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The target of the special pattern management process is the second special pattern if S1003 of the special pattern control process is judged as YES, and the target of the special pattern management process is the first special pattern if S1004 of the special pattern control process is judged as YES.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 52 are the control state numbers for the special symbols. The main CPU 1201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S1011).

If it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0 (if S1011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S1011 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1012, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1013. The main CPU 1201 performs the process from S1013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1012.

In S1013, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display start process. This S1013 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1014.

In S1014, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S1014 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1015.

In S1015, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S1015 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1016.

In S1016, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S1016 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 57. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1017.

In S1017, the main CPU 1201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S1017 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1018.

In S1018, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. This S1018 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

After completing steps S1013 to S1018, the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 51).

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S1021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S1021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special pattern. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1023.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to determine whether the special symbol is a hit. In this process, a hit determination table for special symbols (see FIG. 47) is referenced, and a hit determination for the special symbol is performed using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, it is determined whether the special symbol is a hit or a miss. In the hit determination process for the special symbol, first, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a hit, and if this process determines that there is no hit, it is determined that there is a miss. After executing the process of S1023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result (e.g., a big hit or a miss) of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 48) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" and "symbol designation command". After executing the process of S1024, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a jackpot. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 49) is referenced, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "hit time selection symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S1024). In this embodiment, there are multiple types of jackpots, but there may be only one type of jackpot. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to multiple types of jackpots, multiple types of misses may be provided. In this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. After executing the process of S1025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1023), the random number value for reach determination and/or the random number value for effect selection, etc. Note that the variation pattern table referenced when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may differ depending on the game state, etc. After executing the process of S1026, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 50) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S1026) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S1027, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S1014 in FIG. 52) is performed. After executing the process of S1028, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1029.

In S1029, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1029, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1030.

In S1030, the main CPU 1201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., special bonus flags, time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S1030, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1031.

In S1031, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S1030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S1031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1041).

If it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S1041 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S1041 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S1015 in FIG. 52) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S1042, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1043.

In S1043, the main CPU 1201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1043, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1044.

In S1044, the main CPU 1201 increments the value of the determined symbol counter by 1. As described above in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific condition, such as the number of times remaining in the special symbol mode or the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode. After executing the process of S1044, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S1051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S1051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1052.

At S1052, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S1052 that a jackpot has been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S1052 returns YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing for the jackpot game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 45 for both) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbols that are the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S1053, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 1131 can be opened (S1055), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1056), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1057), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S1058), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S1059). Note that by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1057) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S1016 in FIG. 52) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

Returning to S1052, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display pattern that indicates a jackpot (if S1052 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1051 to S1060) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1060 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 55) will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S1061). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S1061, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S1063). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1063, the main CPU 1201 terminates the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) as described above.

[2-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 57, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 52) will be described. Fig. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S1071 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S1071 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The round counter count value (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process of S1072, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1073.

In S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S1073 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit (if S1073 is judged as YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1074. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S1073 is judged as NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1077.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1074), the jackpot end process (see S1018 in FIG. 52) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1074, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S1076). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1076, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

In S1077, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing in S1077, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1078.

In S1078, the main CPU 1201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 1131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 1131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 1131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 1131 wins, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 1131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1078, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1079.

In S1079, the main CPU 1201 performs a special prize opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 1201 generates data for controlling the opening/closing of the special prize opening 1131. After executing S1079, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1080.

In S1080, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1080) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S1017 in FIG. 52) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1080, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1081.

In S1081, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1081, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1082.

In S1082, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the command to display when the large prize opening is in progress. The command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1082, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 58, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 52) will be described. Fig. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1091).

If it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S1091 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S1091 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the count switch 1132 (see FIG. 45) that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening winning counter counted by the count switch 1132 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203.

If it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 1131 is not equal to or greater than the maximum number of prizes (if S1092 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1093.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1092 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 1131 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of prizes (if S1092 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1094.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 1131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S1078 in FIG. 57) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 1131 has not elapsed (if S1093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1093 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 1131 has elapsed (if S1093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1094.

In S1094, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for setting the closure of the large prize opening 1131. After executing the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1095.

In S1095, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1095) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S1016 in FIG. 52) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S1095, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1096.

In S1096, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1096, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1097.

In S1097, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1097, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1018 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52) will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the second pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S1101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 52), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 51).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S1101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed. After executing the processing of S1103, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 52), and returns to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 51). In this case, as described above, it returns to the processing from which the jackpot end processing was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interruption prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interruption prohibited area.

[3. The third pachinko game machine]
Next, the third pachinko game machine will be described. As described above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, and there are a first route and a second route as routes until the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state. The first route is when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. The second route is when the V attacker is opened by deriving a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "gimmick opening hit", and the game ball that entered the opened V attacker enters the V winning hole in the V attacker.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a sequential variation machine that does not display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but displays them in the order of winning. However, it is not limited to this, and may be the priority variation machine described above.

In the following explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 2184 (see Figure 61) to outside the third pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 2186 (see Figure 61) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In describing the third pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, the configuration will be described with reference to new drawings used in describing the third pachinko gaming machine, using different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 2010 of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 60. This game board unit 2010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 60 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 2120, etc.) arranged in the play area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine, but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 60, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 2110, a center role 2115 located approximately in the center of the game area 2105, a first start opening 2120, a second start opening 2140, a general winning opening 2122, a passing gate unit 2125, a special electric role unit 2130, a normal electric role unit 2145, an LED unit 2149, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2149 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 2100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the gaming area 2105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 2105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is arranged behind the gaming panel 2100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 2100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 2100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number) similar to the first pachinko game machine. The play area 2105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 2006 (see FIG. 61 described later) to the upper part of the play area 2105.

(Center role)
The center device 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 2116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 2006 towards the game area 2105 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107. A game ball flowing down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 2107.

The center device 2115 also has a warp entrance 2117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 2106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 are configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed in the center device 2115. The stage 2118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 2007 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 2119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 2118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 2120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 2120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 2117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 but do not enter the chance entrance 2119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 2120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 2007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 2120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 2120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 61 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, a maximum of four) are held. When the start conditions are met, the held start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit from the left may be able to win in the second starting hole 2140.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 2141. When the second start hole switch 2141 (see FIG. 61 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 2140, start information for the second special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) are reserved. The reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start hole 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize entry)
A plurality of general winning openings 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the plurality of general winning openings 2122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 2123 (see FIG. 61 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 2122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 2125 is a unit body that integrates a passing gate 2126 that is arranged in the right area 2107 and is configured so that a game ball hit from the right side can pass through, and a passing gate switch 2127 (see FIG. 61 described later) that detects the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 2126, and is arranged in the right area 2107 and is configured so that a game ball hit from the right side can pass through. When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 2126 is detected, starting information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved various data are used for the winning judgment process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passing of the game ball to the passing gate unit 2125, the prize ball is not paid out. The passing gate unit 2125 may be arranged in the left area 2106 instead of or in addition to the right area 2107.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 2131, a large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right side area 2107.

The large prize opening 2131 is positioned so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 2131 described above, a large prize opening that allows game balls hit from the left to win may be arranged, or a large prize opening that allows game balls to win may be arranged above the center gimmick 2115.

The large prize opening 2131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric device 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 61 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric device 2133, i.e., the special electric shutter 2134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the large prize opening 2131 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening 2131 or is difficult to enter. The large prize opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state when the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above. When the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state via the first route is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing multiple rounds of round play in which the jackpot opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 2145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 2146, and is disposed in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 2140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 2141.

The normal electric device 2146 is equipped with a normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 61 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 2147. The normal electric device 2146, i.e., the normal power shutter 2147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 2140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 2140. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 2147 that can move back and forth, a movable member known as an electric chute may be used.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passing gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 comprises an opening and closing winning port 2151 opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 capable of opening and closing the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker solenoid 2154 which operates the V attacker 2152 to open and close the opening and closing winning port 2151, a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass, and a V attacker count switch 2153 which detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152, and a V winning port 2155 through which a game ball which has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening and closing winning port 2151 can pass. The V winning device 2150 includes a V winning port switch 2156 for detecting that a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 has entered (passed) the V winning port 2155, a losing port 2157 through which game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 but have not entered the V winning port 2155 can enter (pass), a V shutter 2158 for opening and closing the V winning port 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 for operating the V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning port 2155, and a locking member 2160 for holding only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150. The V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passing gate 2126 or in the left area 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arc-shaped member, and is normally in a closed state with the opening and closing winning opening 2151 closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode is derived indicating a "perfect opening of the special device" described below, the V attacker 2152 is activated, for example, once, almost simultaneously with the end of the variable display of the special symbol, by the activation of the V attacker solenoid 2154 (see FIG. 61 described below). When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, it enters an open state with the opening and closing winning opening 2151 open for, for example, 1800 msec. Then, while the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is open due to the activation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 per opening is, for example, 10.

The manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when a stop display mode indicating a "hit on the opening of the special feature" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be opened twice for 900 msec, or may be closed when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one) enter the interior of the V winning device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150. When the V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning device 2150, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and increments the value of the V attacker winning counter, which is a function of the main CPU 2201. When the V attacker winning counter reaches a specified value, the V attacker 2152 is activated by the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the opening/closing winning port 2151 is closed, even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that the opening/closing winning port 2151 can be opened has not elapsed.

The V attacker 2152 continues to be controlled to open when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 2155. In other words, the V winning hole 2155 is the winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 61) detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 opens, it continues to control the opening of the V attacker 2152. In other words, it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route. When it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state is played for a predetermined number of rounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the first route, a round game is executed in which the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state, whereas when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state in the first round, but a round game in which, for example, the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state may be executed midway through the round game.

In addition, for example, by providing a V entry port inside the special electric device 2133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state), it is possible to have one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "game device open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the special electric device 2133, control is performed to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing port 2157 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning port 2155 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 2157 are discharged outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the losing port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends.

The V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a constant manner between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V winning opening 2155, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 61 described later). In this embodiment, for example, the V shutter 2158 constantly operates in a constant manner in a cycle (period) of 7000 msec, repeating the operation of "closed for 6000 msec -> open for 1000 msec -> closed for 6000 msec".

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning port 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that enter the V winning device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157. Even if multiple game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged outside the machine from the losing port 2157.

In addition, after a certain time (e.g., 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V attacker 2152 was activated, the locking member 2160 releases the game ball by the activation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that has been released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is open at this time, it enters (passes through) the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is closed at this time, it passes through the losing port 2157. Note that the locking member 2160 may not be provided and game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning port 2155 or the losing port 2157.

(Outlet)
The outlet 2178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 2105 but have not won or entered any of the various winning ports (for example, the first start port 2120, the second start port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric role unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, so that game balls flowing down the game area 2105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 2010, as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 2007, and is provided with a group of performance-use accessories 2058, such as movable accessories, controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 2058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the third pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but will be described again in detail.

As shown in FIG. 61, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 2300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 2201 is connected to the main ROM 2202, the main RAM 2203, the initial reset circuit 2204, etc. The main CPU 2201 has built-in functions such as a WDT that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 2201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 has a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201, this is not limited to this, and any readable and writable storage medium can be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 2200 also includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 2300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 2165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 2166, the normal power solenoid 2148, the special power solenoid 2135, the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the V shutter solenoid 2159. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 2170 and the error notification monitor 2172. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the proportion of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 2172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, the error notification monitor 2172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a pattern that is not normally displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the first start port switch 2121, the second start port switch 2141, the pass gate switch 2127, the large prize port count switch 2132, the V attacker count switch 2153, the V prize port switch 2156, and the general prize port switch 2123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 2200 via the I/O port 2205.

The main control circuit 2200 is further connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 2184 used to transmit data to a hall computer 2186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key 2174 operated to change or check the setting value if the pachinko machine has a setting function, and a backup clear switch 2176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 according to the operation of the gaming center manager. Note that if the pachinko machine has a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided.

The setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the game arcade. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176, so that the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key 2174 and/or the backup clear switch 2176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 2400 or the power supply circuit 2450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the person in charge of the amusement facility from easily touching the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 2300 includes a sub-CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a sound control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a role control circuit 2307, and a command input port 2308. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 61, like the first pachinko game machine, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the third pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 2301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 2301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub-CPU 2301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. In response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub-CPU 2301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of performance reels 2058). The reel control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 2307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 2301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 2308 is connected to the command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 2006 for launching game balls, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball lending operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. The operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.

The power supply circuit 2450 is connected to a power switch 2095 and other components. The power switch 2095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 62 to 65. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

The third pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control. The third pachinko gaming machine also has a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed, and the main CPU 2201 can proceed with the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is recommended in normal game mode, and right-handed hitting is recommended in time-saving game mode. The sub-CPU 2301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method, for example, in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 62 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 62, when a gaming ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120, the lottery result is determined to be a "jackpot" or a "miss" in the hit determination process for the first special symbol using the random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. Also, when a gaming ball enters (passes) the second starting hole 2140, the lottery result is determined to be a "jackpot" or a "hit by opening the special feature" in the hit determination process for the second special symbol using the random number value for determining a jackpot for the second special symbol.

It is not essential that a "hit on the release of the special feature" is not determined when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, but even if a "hit on the release of the special feature" is determined, it is preferable that the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" is extremely low compared to when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot"). Also, it is not essential that a "miss" is not determined when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, but if a "miss" is determined, the probability may be higher than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature" or lower than the probability of the "hit on the release of the special feature".

The hit determination table for special symbols stored in the main ROM 2202 specifies the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for hit determination that is determined to be a "hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding determination value data ("hit determination value data", "miss determination value data") as data used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol executed based on the winning of the first starting hole 2120. Also, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for hit determination that is determined to be a "hit" or a "hit on the release of the special feature" and the corresponding determination value data ("hit determination value data", "hit on the release of the special feature" as data used in the hit determination process for the second special symbol executed based on the winning of the second starting hole 2140 is specified.

In addition, this third pachinko game machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined for a "jackpot," but this is not essential, and the jackpot probability may be increased, for example, by setting a probability-change flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in this third pachinko gaming machine, the total random number value for the random number value used to determine a jackpot is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated within the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

When the third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of hitting the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the special feature opening according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate for the V winning device 2150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 2155, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the special feature opening, the opening frequency of the V winning port 2155 (i.e., the operation frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled in the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 63 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "hit symbol selection command" and a "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the start hole 2120, 2140 and the aforementioned determination value data. The "hit symbol selection command" is a command for designating the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 63, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the hit-time selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 3, "z0" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 4 and 60, "z1" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 61 and 99, "z2" is selected as the hit-time selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the hit time selection symbol command is not selected, and the symbol designation command "zA2" is selected.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the winning judgment value data for opening the special symbol is obtained as a result of the winning judgment process for the second special symbol, for example, the winning selection symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 95, "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 96 or 97, "z5" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA5" is selected as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is 98 or 99, "z6" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command.

[3-3-3. Jackpot Type Determination Table]
Fig. 64 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko game machine. The jackpot type determination table is referenced when determining the type of jackpot, such as the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state, the value of the time-saving flag, and the number of time-saving times, according to the hit-time selection symbol command determined in response to the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Note that the remarks column in Fig. 64 is written for convenience and easy understanding.

As shown in FIG. 64, for example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3," the number of rounds of the round play executed in the jackpot play state is determined to be "15," the value of the time-saving flag is determined to be "1," and the number of time-saving times after the jackpot play state is determined to be "4."

The winning time selection symbol commands "z4", "z5" and "z6" are the winning time selection symbol commands when the judgment value data is "functional release winning judgment value data" (i.e., when the result of the special symbol winning judgment process is a functional release winning), and specify the number of rounds and the number of time reductions when the V attacker 2152 is opened by the functional release winning and the game ball is detected to pass through the V winning hole 2155, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Therefore, even if the result of the special symbol winning judgment process is a functional release winning, if the game ball is not detected to pass through the V winning hole 2155 and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state, and the number of time reductions specified in the jackpot type determination table in FIG. 64 will not be set.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
Fig. 65 is an example of a variation pattern table of the special symbols of the third pachinko game machine. The "Performance Content" column in Fig. 65 is shown for the sake of convenience. The main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the winning is based on the winning of a game ball into the second start hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 65, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 2140.

As shown in FIG. 65, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection obtained when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "miss," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the time-saving flag, the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value obtained when the gaming ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120. Note that since hitting to the right is recommended in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the gaming ball will rarely enter the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection obtained when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit to open the special feature" and the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the reach determination random number value and the performance selection random number value obtained when the gaming ball enters the second start hole 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the reel" and the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to be a long fluctuation presentation with an extremely long fluctuation time, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the game ball will not basically enter (pass) the second start hole 2140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and the game ball does enter the second start hole 2140, this is done to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub-CPU 2301. The sub-CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 2201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 13 to 16). Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and the other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will not be described. Note that, although the processes executed in the special symbol control process in the third pachinko game machine include the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (for example, the jackpot end process (Figs. 29 and 76)), the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine will be described below with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process carried out in the main control process (see FIGS. 13 to 16) in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S2001, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 2201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S2001, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203, etc., in a predetermined register.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of checking the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, when both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S242 in FIG. 32 described later). Then, when the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demo display performance. Note that the second pachinko game machine is not a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and therefore does not have the concept of a main special symbol as described in the first pachinko game machine.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S2002 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S2002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S2003 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is not pending (if S2004 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 13 to 16).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S2004 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S2003 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. After executing the processing of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 13 to 16).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt prohibited period.

In this manner, in this embodiment, a priority variation machine in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is reserved has been described as the third pachinko gaming machine, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special pattern is reserved, the priority variation machine may be one in which the special pattern management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variation machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning in the first start port 2120 or the second start port 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66) will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The processing target of the special pattern management process is the second special pattern if S2003 of the special pattern control process is judged as YES, and the processing target is the first special pattern if S2004 of the special pattern control process is judged as YES.

The numbers ("0" to "7") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 67 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 2201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S2011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S2011 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the process from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S2013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S2014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 69. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S2015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S2016 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening control process. This S2017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process in S2018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 74. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S2019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. This S2020 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

After completing steps S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko game machine.

Note that if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 68, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S2021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S2021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2022, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 62) is referenced, and a hit determination for the special symbol is performed using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a hit or a miss. Also, if the second special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a hit or a hit with the release of the special symbol. In the hit determination process for the first special symbol, first, a process is performed to determine whether it is a hit or not, and if it is determined that it is not a hit in this process, it is determined that it is a miss. Similarly, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, first, a process is performed to determine whether it is a hit or not, and if it is determined that it is not a hit in this process, it is determined that it is a hit with the release of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (e.g., a big hit, a role release hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 63) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "hit time selection symbol command" or "symbol designation command". After executing the process of S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a jackpot or a special feature opening hit. In this process, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64) is referenced, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the "hit time selection pattern command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S2024). Note that the type of jackpot determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a special feature opening hit is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed due to the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the special feature opening hit. In addition, in this embodiment, the types of jackpots and special feature opening hits are both multiple types, but the type of jackpot or special feature opening hit may be one type. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of jackpots and/or device release wins, multiple types of misses may be provided. After executing the process of S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S2023), the value of the time-saving flag, the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 65) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process for the special symbol (S2026) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 67) is performed. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 is performed. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., probability bonus flags, time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S2030, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect start command. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game status management process (S2030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described with reference to Fig. 69. Fig. 69 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the third pachinko game machine.

Note that if the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S2041 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S2041 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 67) will be performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of times a special symbol game is remaining or the number of times a time-saving game is remaining. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described with reference to Fig. 70. Fig. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

Note that if this special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the target of processing, the first special symbol is the target of processing. Similarly, if the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the target of processing, the second special symbol is the target of processing.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S2051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S2051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S2052 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S2052 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2053. Note that if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a win for the release of a special reel, or if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss, then a NO judgment is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for the jackpot game control processing. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signal that is generated and updated in this processing is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2053, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2054.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 2131 can be opened (S2055), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2058), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S2059). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2057), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

At S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a special feature has been opened, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a special feature has been opened.

If it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is not a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination, i.e., that the special symbol that has stopped is a winning combination (if S2060 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2061.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for game control when a special feature is opened. In this processing, signals (e.g., a special feature opening signal, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2061, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened, set in this process, is, for example, 1 time. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as setting a signal for opening a special device to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), setting a game state designation parameter (S2065), and reserving the transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S2066). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 70) will be described with reference to Fig. 71. Fig. 71 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S2071). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2073). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2073, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) as described above.

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 72, a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 67) will be described. Fig. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S2081 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S2081 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, a maximum of 900 msec opening may be performed a maximum of two times per opening, or the first opening may be performed for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second opening may be performed for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, multiple opening patterns may be provided for each opening of the role within a total time not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec), and one of these multiple opening patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of the special pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this processing, processing is performed to generate opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155. After executing the processing of S2083, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 67) is performed after the V winning device opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2084, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 73, a V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 67) will be described. Fig. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S2091 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S2091 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 61), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 2150, is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is not equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2093.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the maximum opening time of the open/close winning port 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 72) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (if S2093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the open/close winning port 2151). After executing the process of S2094, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V entry has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V entry port 2155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V entry port switch 2156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the V entry device 2150, and may be, for example, within a specified time from when the V attacker 2152 begins to operate, or within a specified time from when the game ball is released from the engagement by the engagement member 2160, etc.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V win has been detected (if S2095 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for V hit game control. In this process, a signal (e.g., a V hit signal, etc.) output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 61 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. The signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game judgment process. When the V hit game control is executed, for example, 15 rounds of round play are executed as shown in the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 64), so that the player can win a large number of prize balls as in the case where the big hit game control process is executed. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V hit game control and the big hit game control process are distinguished and called, but the V hit game control can also be called the big hit game control process. After executing the process of S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 2152), which was first performed based on the opening of the reel, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the V winning game control, which is executed when it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S2095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), a process of setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), a process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2102), and a process of reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command (S2103). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of preparing to open the large winning port (see S2018 in FIG. 67) is performed after the special pattern game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 2201 then ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined that no V win was detected in S2095 (if S2095 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 74, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 67) will be described. Fig. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S2111 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S2111 is judged as YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The round counter count value (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S2113 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 67) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S2113 returns NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S2117, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a big prize, and the stop display mode indicating a big prize is derived (YES determination is made in S2052 in FIG. 70), and the big prize game control process is started by the result being a big prize, the large prize opening 2131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a role release hit, and the stop display mode indicating the role release is derived (YES determination is made in S2060 in FIG. 70), and further, a V win is detected (YES determination is made in S2095 in FIG. 73), and the V win game control is started by the result being a V win device 2150 (i.e., the open/closed prize opening 2151) is selected as the large prize opening to be opened. After executing processing of S2118, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing processing of S2119, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2120.

The above "large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150" corresponds to the large prize opening selected in S2118 as the large prize opening to be opened between the large prize opening 2131 and the V prize device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is performed. After executing the process of S2120, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), the large prize opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 67) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2122, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the command to display when the large prize opening is in progress. The command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-10. Large prize opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 75, a special prize opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 67) will be described. Fig. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if S2131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (if S2131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 61), which counts the number of winning game balls in the large prize opening 2131, or the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 61), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the V prize device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2133.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the large prize opening related various setting process (see S2119 in FIG. 74) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2133 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 67).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 has elapsed (if S2133 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to close the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), the large prize opening preparation processing (see S2018 in FIG. 67) will be performed again after this large prize opening control processing is completed. After executing processing of S2135, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S2136, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S242 in FIG. 32) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (if S2141 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 67), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 66). In this case, it returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (if S2141 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S2142, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 71 is performed. After executing the processing of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 67), and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 66). In this case, as described above, the processing returns to the processing from which the jackpot end processing was called.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[4. Extension Example]
The following describes an example of an extension common to the first, second, and third pachinko game machines. Since the symbols attached to the components are different depending on the first, second, and third pachinko game machines, the symbols are omitted in the following description except when the description is limited to a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine).

[4-1. Example of extended probability control]
In the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine, whether or not to set the special probability flag on is determined depending on the type of jackpot, and when the special probability flag is set on, the number of special probability rounds is determined, but this is not limited to this and may be, for example, in the following manner.

For example, the machine may be a so-called V-type high probability machine that determines whether or not a specific area provided in a large prize opening has been passed during execution of the jackpot game control process, and sets a high probability flag to ON when the jackpot game control process ends if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area. Note that the specific area can be changed between an open state where game balls can or easily pass through and a closed state where game balls cannot or have difficulty entering, for example, by the operation of a movable member during a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process.

In such a V-type high probability machine, for example, the ease with which the game ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, i.e., the probability that the high probability flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, may be made different between when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, as will be described later with reference to Figures 77 to 80.

Figure 77 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the jackpot opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through to the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through to the specific area. Note that in the example shown in Figure 77, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that, although Figure 77 shows the large prize opening being opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening manner of the large prize opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 77(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is open while the large prize opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large prize opening has begun. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is likely to be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, if no game balls have passed through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the special probability flag is not set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 77(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the large prize opening to the end of the long opening of the large prize opening. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is extremely easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is very easily set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, as described above, if the specific area is in an open state but no game balls have passed through the specific area, the special probability flag is not set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(C), in the third opening mode, the specific area is closed except for the time when the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined time after the large prize opening has started to be long-opened (both of these times are short). Therefore, compared to either the first or second opening mode, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability variable flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In FIG. 77, an example is described in which two opening modes, a first opening mode and a second opening mode, are provided as examples of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of a specific area in which at least one of a plurality of game balls that have entered a large prize opening can easily pass through the specific area during execution of a jackpot game control process is not limited to two modes, and may be only one mode or three or more modes.

Also, in FIG. 77, an example of a third opening mode is described as an example of a specific area opening mode in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process is not limited to one mode, and two or more modes may be provided.

Figure 78 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in this Figure 78, when the winning/losing determination value data is "jackpot determination value data" (when the result of the special symbol winning determination process is a jackpot), the winning time selection symbol commands for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are selected as follows. That is, when the result of the first special symbol winning determination process is a jackpot, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z0" with a selection rate of 40%, "z1" with a selection rate of 10%, and "z2" with a selection rate of 50%. Also, when the result of the second special symbol winning determination process is a jackpot, the winning time selection symbol command is, for example, "z3" with a selection rate of 15%, "z4" with a selection rate of 50%, and "z5" with a selection rate of 35%.

Figure 79 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in this Figure 79, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (3R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the first opening mode (10R certainty jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination C).

That is, according to the above-mentioned Figures 77 to 79, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is determined to be 3R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 40%, 10R normal jackpot A with a selection rate of 10%, and 10R special jackpot A with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is determined to be 10R normal jackpot B with a selection rate of 15%, 10R special jackpot B with a selection rate of 50%, and 10R special jackpot C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, it is possible to make the probability that the special jackpot flag is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process different between when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a jackpot.

In addition, in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to being opened by time control as shown in Figures 77 (A) to (C), but may be opened in response to a game ball entering a jackpot opening, for example, as shown in Figure 80 described below.

Figure 80 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the large prize opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the expanded example of the large prize game control process (an example in which the specific area is controlled to be in an open state based on a win in the large prize opening), showing (A) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, and (B) a case in which the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the large prize opening is opened, when the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the large prize opening and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize opening count switch, the specific area is opened based on this detection until the large prize opening is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the probability variable flag is easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the probability variable flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 80(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large prize winning hole is opened, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time only when the first game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch. Even if the second game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch, the specific area does not become open and remains closed until the winning hole is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the large prize game control, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the large prize game control process. However, even in this case, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability of winning flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In the above, an example was described in which if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the probability variable flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag may be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. This type of specification is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, such as a third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the same opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and for example, an opening pattern dedicated to the first special symbol and an opening pattern dedicated to the second special symbol may be set.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the third mode may be determined to be one in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (e.g. the second special symbol) is a hit, only a mode in which it is easy for at least one game ball to pass through the specific area (the first mode or the second mode) is determined.

Also, in the above, in the third mode in which it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area is in an open state twice (both for a short period of time) while the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening starts to be long-opened; however, if it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area may be in an open state once or multiple times.

The closure of a specific area may be controlled to occur after a predetermined opening time has elapsed, or after the round in which the specific area is open has ended, or in response to a set number of large prize openings or winnings in the specific area. There may also be one or more combined conditions for closure.

It may also be a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are alternately executed repeatedly until a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed (for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, etc.). At this time, the loop number is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number, or may be determined according to, for example, the random number value of the special pattern, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, in the case of a setting machine, the limiter number may be different depending on the setting value.

In the above, we have described a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the variable probability control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached, but this is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot game state and the game state in which the time-saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine such as the third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned V-type high probability machine, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the high probability control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-type high probability machine, if the limiter number is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, and the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although it is not considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, since the game ball has not passed through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area while a jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game control process, the machine is controlled to a game state (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) in which the probability variable control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played, and when the predetermined number of special symbol games are played, the machine may be a so-called ST machine in which the probability variable control is not executed (e.g., normal game state, time-saving game state, etc.). In such a game machine, the number of special symbol games in which the probability variable control is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "ST number") may be a fixed number, or may be different each time. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the expected value of the ST number may be different depending on the setting value. Furthermore, the machine may be a so-called falling type game machine in which a falling lottery is performed and the probability variable control ends based on the result of the falling lottery, or it may be a so-called V probability variable type game machine in which the probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state when the game ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game state.

[4-2. Example of time-saving control extension]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, the time-saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process is completed, but the time-saving control may also be executed even if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is not a jackpot.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, a time-saving hit/miss determination process may be performed separately from the special symbol hit determination process to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control, using a specific random number value (e.g., a random number value for special symbol hit determination, a pattern random number value of a special symbol, etc.) from among the random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole. When a time-saving hit/miss determination is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, for example, when the pattern random number value of a special symbol extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is a specific pattern random number value, it can be determined to be a "time-saving hit" in which time-saving control is executed. Note that the time-saving hit/miss determination process may also be performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit.

In addition, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is performed separately from the special pattern winning/losing determination process, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be performed prior to the special pattern winning/losing determination process in the same frame.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is used exclusively for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be generated within a predetermined range, and the random number value for time-saving winning/losing may be extracted based on, for example, the entry of a game ball into the starting hole, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing.

The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process does not necessarily have to be extracted based on the game ball winning the start port, but may be extracted based on the game ball winning in other areas (for example, the general winning port, the small winning port, the large winning port, etc.). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be provided, and the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be extracted based on the game ball passing through this dedicated area.

For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process and the special pattern winning/losing determination process are executed at different times, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed during the variable display of the special pattern, which, when confirmed, derives a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process may be a "time-saving winning". In such a case, the main CPU may forcibly derive, for example, a display mode indicating a "time-saving losing" even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning".

The sub-CPU also preferably controls the display of a performance image (such as a decorative pattern change performance or a character display performance) on the display device that allows or makes it easy to understand from the outside whether the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving miss." In this case, the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special pattern win/loss judgment process, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result, it is also possible to execute control to display on the display device an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern change effect or a character display effect, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is disclosed.

In addition, in a typical pachinko game machine, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU controls the display device (e.g., liquid crystal display device) to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls in a jackpot game state. In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub-CPU controls the display device to display, for example, a performance image showing a right-hit instruction as the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed. However, if the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the performance image showing the recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be displayed on the display device at all times, or may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time-saving hits set based on the "time-saving hit" is a predetermined number or more (e.g., 2 or more), it may be displayed, but if it is less than the predetermined number (e.g., less than 2), it may not be displayed. Note that the above specific conditions are not limited to the number of time-saving conditions, but can be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving hit/lose determination process is executed before the special pattern hit determination process is executed, the sub-CPU may execute control to display on the display device a performance image that is externally comprehensible or easily comprehensible as to whether or not the special pattern hit determination process will be executed under the "time-saving hit" condition (i.e., under the condition in which the time-saving flag is set to on).

The following is a summary of the processes related to time-saving, such as the type of random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the conditions for judging a time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the game state in which the time-saving winning/losing judgment process can be executed, the state of the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times set when a time-saving winning/losing is achieved, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the number of time-saving times, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the display of the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process.

(Type of random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any of a plurality of types of random number values, such as a random number value for special symbol winning judgment, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for normal winning judgment, a random number value for normal symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol fall judgment, and a dedicated random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment. In addition, in the case of a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination), but may be determined using multiple types of random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether a special pattern has been won and a random number value for determining the pattern).

(Timing of extracting random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The timing of extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any timing, such as when the game ball enters the start gate which triggers the special symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through the pass gate which triggers the execution of the normal symbol winning judgment process, when the game ball passes through a dedicated area which triggers the execution of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, etc. The extraction of the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on the winning of a specific winning gate or the like which has a prize ball payout, or may be performed based on the passing through a specific gate or a specific out-gate which has no prize ball payout.

In addition, if the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is extracted based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the start port, the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start port or the second start port, or the random number value for the time-saving winning/losing judgment may be extracted only when the game ball enters one of the specific start ports.

(Conditions for determining whether a time-saving win has been won in the time-saving winning/losing determination process)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment process, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the extracted random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern winning/losing judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing judgment value data, a specific small winning judgment value data, or/and a specific big winning judgment value data. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the pattern random number value of the special pattern, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific losing pattern, a specific small winning pattern, or a specific big winning pattern. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for special pattern falling judgment, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the data is a specific random number value for special pattern falling judgment. When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the changed setting value, it is preferable to determine that the time-saving winning/losing is a winning when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed using the random number value for normal winning judgment or the random number value for normal pattern determination. Furthermore, the conditions for determining the time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process are not limited to the above conditions and can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In the third pachinko game machine, even if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special symbol and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 is opened passes through the V winning port 2155, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times according to the type of hit to open the special symbol. And, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a hit to open the special symbol and the V attacker 2152 is opened but the game ball is not detected to pass through the V winning port 2155 and the jackpot game control process is not executed, if the result of the time-saving hit/loss judgment process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 may determine whether or not to execute time-saving control and the number of time-saving times based on the "time-saving hit." However, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is "time-saving miss," and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit to open the device, and the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens does not pass through the V winning port 2155, the time-saving control will not be executed.

(Time-saving winning/losing judgment processing execution timing)
When the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed at the start of the variable display of the special pattern using a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination obtained based on the winning (passing) of the game ball at the starting hole, the main CPU may retain the obtained random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination, in the same manner as the start information of the special pattern.

The main CPU may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (e.g., before it is reserved), or may reserve the extracted random number value and execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process until the variable display of the special pattern begins, or may execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment process at the start of the variable display of the special pattern.

(Game state in which time-saving winning/losing judgment processing can be executed)
The time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or may be executed only in a game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). In addition, for example, a condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be determined in advance, such as executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process in any game state, or executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process only in a specific game state, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed when the determined condition is satisfied.

(Mode of time-saving control)
The mode of time-saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time-saving control executed according to the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag may be prepared, and when the time-saving control is executed according to the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag may be set to on, and when the time-saving control is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the second time-saving flag may be set to on. In this case, when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, it is preferable to execute time-saving control with different functions. For example, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, both the special chart shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, only one of the special chart shortening control and the electric support control is performed. Also, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, the first time-saving game state is controlled in which only the special chart shortening control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, the second time-saving game state is controlled in which only the electric support control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags is set to on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, for example, or may be determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed.

(Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits)
It is preferable that the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning/losing", is determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when multiple random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment are specified as time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times to be set may be determined according to the extracted random numbers for time-saving winning/losing judgment instead of or in addition to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed. For example, when the random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is the first time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "100", and when it is the second time-saving winning/losing judgment value data, the number of time-saving times is determined to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving winning/losing determination process may be executed even in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning," the main CPU may set the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" in place of the remaining number of time-saving times (i.e., reset the remaining number of time-saving times). In this case, the degree of benefit to the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time-saving times is more or less than the remaining number of time-saving times, thereby expanding the scope of gameplay, and making the time-saving game state where the time-saving flag is on more interesting and increasing interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may add the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving times. In this case, the number of time-saving times will never be less than the current remaining number of time-saving times, allowing the player to play with peace of mind in a game state in which time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may predetermine one of two processes: a process of replacing the remaining number of time-saving wins with the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" and setting it as a new number, or a process of adding the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving wins, and set the number of time-saving wins in a manner that satisfies the predetermine condition.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a time-saving control having a different function is executed when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning", the main CPU may change the process of setting the number of time-saving times depending on whether the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function or different functions. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of the same function, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be added to the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving winning" are time-saving controls of different functions, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving winning" may be newly set (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times may be reset) instead of the remaining number of time-saving times being executed. In addition, if the time-saving control currently being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls with different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" may be executed after all remaining times of the currently executed time-saving are consumed.

When the number of time-saving times is set based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning", the number of time-saving times may be set to "0". In other words, if the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be "0", the time-saving flag is set to on even though the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is "time-saving winning". Also, if the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed during the execution of time-saving control is "time-saving winning" and the number of time-saving times is set to "0", the time-saving control being executed will end.

(Time-saving control start timing)
The timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process being a "time-saving hit," can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the time-saving control can be started based on the passage of the special symbol determination time during which the special symbol is determined. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

When the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process being a "time-saving hit", is the end of the special pattern game, and the time-saving hit/miss determination process is performed prior to the special pattern hit determination process in the same frame, even if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit", if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, it is preferable to invalidate the "time-saving hit" (the time-saving flag is not set on based on the "time-saving hit") and set the time-saving flag on based on the hit time selection pattern command (the time-saving flag may not be set on depending on the type of jackpot).

In addition, the start timing of the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning/losing win," is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed prior to the special symbol winning/losing determination process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing determination process is executed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process. In this case, the game state (i.e., whether or not the time-saving control is executed) may differ between the time when the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is extracted and the time when the time-saving winning/losing determination process is executed, which can increase interest.

Furthermore, the timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process being a "time-saving winning" may be after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is a "time-saving winning" and before the time-saving control starts, the sub-CPU can execute a teasing performance as to whether or not the time-saving control will start, which can increase interest.

In the third pachinko game machine, when the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol being a jackpot (a jackpot for which time-saving control is executed), the time-saving control based on the jackpot may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. Also, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a role-opening hit (a role-opening hit for which time-saving control is executed) and the jackpot game control is executed because the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is detected when the V attacker 2152 is opened, the time-saving control may be started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, if the result of the time-saving hit/miss determination process is a "time-saving hit" and the result of the special pattern hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit to open the special device, and therefore the V attacker 2152 opens, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU may start time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" based on the fact that the open/close winning hole 2151 has closed.

(End timing of time-saving game mode)
The timing at which the time-saving game state ends is, for example, "when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, a variable display of a special pattern is executed for a set number of time-saving times,""when, in a game state in which time-saving control is being executed, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the result of a special pattern hit determination process," or "when the number of time-saving times is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process is a time-saving hit," etc.

In addition, if a small win game control process is executed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process during a game state in which time-saving control is executed, time-saving control will continue to be executed even after the small win game control process ends.

In the third pachinko game machine, if the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is opened when the special symbol hit determination process derives a stopped symbol pattern indicating a jackpot opening hit during the execution of the time-saving control, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens, and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to execute the time-saving control even after the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is closed.

(Rewrite the number of time-saving times)
A time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may rewrite the number of time-saving times, or may not rewrite the number of time-saving times (i.e., execute the time-saving control until the number of time-saving times in the currently executing time-saving control has been exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time-saving times, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" when the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control has been consumed, or may set it when the special pattern hit determination process is executed, or may set it when the variable display of the special pattern starts or stops, or may set it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, and may set it at various times. When setting it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" will overwrite the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control. Also, it may be set in advance to either "rewrite the number of time-saving times" or "add to the previous number of time-saving times," and the number of time-saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Time-saving hit probability)
When the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port or the second start port, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the first start port (hereinafter referred to as the "first time-saving winning/losing judgment process") and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process performed based on the winning of a game ball into the second start port (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving winning/losing judgment process") may have different winning probabilities for time-saving. For example, the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or the winning probability for time-saving when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be the same or approximately the same as the winning probability for time-saving when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed.

(Displaying the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process)
A time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit that displays the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning or losing) and/or a winning number of time-saving times display unit that displays the number of time-saving times determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process (whether the time-saving winning/losing is a winning) may be provided. The time-saving winning/losing judgment result display unit and/or the winning number of time-saving times display unit may be provided in an LED display group that includes a special pattern display unit or the like, and may be controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and/or the number of time-saving times determined based on the winning of the time-saving on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

(interval)
When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU may make the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss." Note that, since the variable display of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol, in this case, it is preferable that the sub-CPU displays an effect image indicating a "time-saving hit" on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device until the above-mentioned interval time has elapsed.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit to open the special feature and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this hit to open the special feature, the main CPU 2201 may set the interval time after the end of the operation related to the hit to open the special feature when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss", or may set it to the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Examples of extensions related to management of game media]
The first, second and third pachinko game machines described in this specification can be applied to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming medium and a bonus (e.g., prize balls, prize data, etc.) is awarded based on the result of the game. In other words, not only can the game be played by shooting or inserting a gaming medium (e.g., a gaming ball, a medal, etc.) by a physical action of a player, and the gaming medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit itself can electromagnetically manage the gaming medium held by the player and enable a game to be played by circulating the enclosed gaming balls or a medal-less game. In addition, the electromagnetic management of the gaming medium held by the player can be a gaming medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the gaming medium.

In the case of gaming machines that circulate enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls serving as gaming media are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that when a prize is won, prize ball data is awarded as a gaming medium instead of prize balls being paid out. In this specification, "paid-out gaming value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if 15 prize balls are won in a prize slot, in the case of an enclosed gaming machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is awarded. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to prize balls or prize ball data, and may be anything equivalent to prize balls or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media are managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device is a device having a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and installed in the game machine, and is connected to an external game media handling device (not shown) via a specified interface with a two-way communication function, and can perform the operation of lending game media (i.e., the operation of providing the game media required when the player inserts the game media), or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (the winning combination is established) (i.e., the operation of making the player obtain the game media required while paying out the game media), or the operation of electromagnetically recording the game media used for play. In addition, the game media management device can not only manage the actual number of game media, but also, for example, a game media number display device (not shown) that displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko game machine based on the management results of the game media number, and can manage the number of game media displayed on this game media number display device. In other words, the gaming media management device should be able to electromagnetically record and display the total number of gaming media that a player can use for gaming.

In this case, the gaming media management device has the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media to an external gaming media handling device, and also has the capability to prevent the number of recorded gaming media from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and the external gaming media handling device, it is desirable that the device has the capability to prevent the player from transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a loan operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device may be provided with an insertion slot for valuables such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal, and various other operation means such as a loan operation means and a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on the gaming medium handling device side (all not shown).

In this case, the game flow is as follows: the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value by operating any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are required. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media were sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device may send only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player may be divided and processed. Also, instead of just discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed, or the media may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. The game media handling device may also be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the amusement center, and the media may be stored in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a locking operation may be performed to lock the gaming media or valuable data communication to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a specified operating means (not shown). In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, and the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the gaming media handling device.

In addition, the above describes the application of the gaming media management device to a pachinko gaming machine, but gaming media management devices can also be installed in pachislot machines, slot machines that use gaming balls, and sealed gaming machines to manage the gaming media of players.

In this way, by providing the gaming medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of parts inside the gaming machine compared to when the gaming medium is physically provided for play, and not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from directly touching the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and the reduction in parts also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. It is also possible to prevent fraudulent activities via the gaming medium and the gaming medium insertion and payout slots. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a gaming system having an enclosed gaming machine configured so that gaming media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and a gaming media management device connected to the gaming machine so that data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media associated with consumption, lending, and dispensing of gaming media can be sent and received by optical signals via a communication cable, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine is explained below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches the game balls as the game medium from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launching pad. This moves the game ball to the launching pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the waiting position to the launching pad to detect the game ball moving to the launching pad. When the subtraction sensor detects the game ball, the number of balls held is subtracted by one. In this way, since the enclosed gaming machine is configured to launch the game balls as the game medium from above into the game area, it is possible to avoid so-called return balls (foul balls). Then, the game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged outside the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number of game balls (for example, 50 balls) circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Alternatively, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism that discharges game balls outside the game machine and a take-in mechanism that takes in the game balls that have been polished outside the game machine into the game machine may be provided. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in the balls from a winning hole provided in the game area.

In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, so there is no upper or lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls. In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not actually in the player's hands, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the player plays. In an enclosed gaming machine, the player starts playing after obtaining balls by loaning them from a gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining balls means that the player obtains gaming media for data management purposes. Then, the balls are consumed by the launching device when the game balls are launched, and the number of balls in hand decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole or the like provided in the playing area, the number of balls in hand is paid out according to the conditions set for each winning hole, and the number of balls in hand increases. Furthermore, the number of balls in hand increases by loaning them from the gaming medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game ends and all or a part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game media management device by clearing all of the game value (i.e., the balls in hand) stored in the enclosed game machine, or by performing an operation to transmit some of the balls in hand to the game media management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls in hand is reduced. Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in a game machine in which game balls are shot from above the game area, foul balls may occur when game balls are shot from below as in conventional game machines. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls in hand increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball occurs. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to consumption, lending, and payout of balls in hand. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" refers to the increase or decrease in the number of balls in hand due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data regarding the increase and decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to data regarding the decrease in balls held due to game balls being fired, and the increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of gaming balls through each winning hole, etc. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a gaming ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out as a result is added to the number of balls held. Also, when a gaming ball is released, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to a gaming media management device by the player's operation. Also, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests to convert the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device to balls held (ball lending) and to count the number of balls held (return). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the gaming media management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the payout control circuit to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the gaming media management device. Here, "game value" refers to currency/paper money, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the game media management device. In this second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept paper money, prepaid media, etc. Furthermore, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange, etc., in the amusement center where the gaming system is installed.

The enclosed gaming machine also has a backup power supply. This allows the data immediately prior to the power being turned off to be retained even if the power is turned off at night, etc. This backup power supply may also be used to, for example, continue to detect the opening of the door frame using a door opening sensor. This also makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Enclosed gaming machines are only required to be configured so that players cannot touch the gaming balls. For example, machines that do not circulate gaming balls in an island facility but circulate them only in the gaming machine itself, and machines that circulate gaming balls in an island facility but do not allow players to touch them are also included in enclosed gaming machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The gaming media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the gaming machine via the gaming machine connection board. The transmitted and received data is information such as the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine model code. Then, with either the gaming machine or the gaming media management device as the source and the other as the destination, when the source transmits a transmission signal, the destination that receives the transmission signal transmits a confirmation signal that is the same as the transmission signal to the source, and the source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same or not.

In this way, the source of transmission can compare the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal to determine whether they are identical, thereby confirming that the signal sent from the source of transmission has been sent to the source without being tampered with. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as tampering with the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

In addition, in the gaming system, the source may have a modulation unit that modulates a signal and transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the destination may have a demodulation unit that demodulates the signal modulated by the modulation unit.

As a result, even if the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device are read, it is difficult to decipher these signals, and fraudulent activities such as tampering with the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the destination receives the transmission signal from the source, the destination may transmit an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, to the source separately from the confirmation signal.

By comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been sent and received based on the approval signal, thereby further strengthening the prevention of fraudulent activities. Also, instead of directly connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device for communication, a frame control circuit may be provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit and the gaming media management device may be connected for communication via the frame control circuit. Also, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the gaming media management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU performs processing so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not stop at a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol.

In more detail, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the main CPU performs control to forcibly stop the other special symbol in a symbol combination that indicates a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, as described above, the game transitions from the general game state to the jackpot game state, but in this jackpot game state, neither the start condition for the first special symbol nor the start condition for the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU suspends the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the general game state to the small win game state (stopping at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol), and resumes the measurement of the variable time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the small win game state to the general game state (end of the small win game). When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the general game state transitions to the small win game state as described above, but in this small win game state, neither the start condition of the first special symbol nor the start condition of the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small win symbol, the main CPU will perform a variable display of the other special symbol that is being displayed in a similar manner to when it is being displayed in a variable manner, consisting of a group of LEDs, but as described above, timing of the variable time will be interrupted.

[5. The fourth pachinko game machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. As described above, the fourth pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine called digital pachinko, and like the second pachinko game machine, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, but only one of them is displayed. In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine is a priority variable machine in which, for example, the start condition of the second special symbol takes precedence over the start condition of the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are reserved, and is also a so-called ST machine. In particular, the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the second pachinko game machine in that it is provided with a distribution device that electrically distributes the game ball captured by the normal electric role object so that it starts and wins either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the second pachinko game machine.

In the following explanation of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the second pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 3184 (see Figure 46) to outside the fourth pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 3186 (see Figure 46) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In addition, when describing the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the second pachinko gaming machine. However, when describing the configuration with reference to new drawings adopted in the description of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has functions and the like in common with the second pachinko gaming machine, it will be described with reference to different reference numbers and step numbers than the second pachinko gaming machine.

[5-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 81 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 3010 provided in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 81, the game board unit 3010 mainly includes a game panel 3100 in which a game area 3105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 3110, a center role 3115 located approximately in the center of the game area 3105, general winning openings 3122A, 3122B, a crane unit 3124, a passing gate unit 3125, a central ball entry opening 3128, a special electric role unit 3130, a normal electric role unit 3145, a start winning role unit 3150, an LED unit 3160, an outlet 3178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 3010. Note that the LED unit 3160 is the same as the LED unit 1160 of the second pachinko game machine, and a description of it will be omitted in this fourth pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 3100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 3007. A guide rail 3110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 3100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted thereon. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 3110 toward the gaming area 3105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 3105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is arranged behind the gaming panel 3100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 3100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 3100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 3100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 3100 is made of transparent resin so that the rear unit can be seen from the front, but the entire game panel 3100 may be made transparent, or only a portion of it may be made transparent.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 3110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number). The play area 3105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 3110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 3006 (see FIG. 87) to the upper part of the play area 3105.

(Center role)
The center device 3115 is configured to be fitted into an opening of the game panel 3100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 3116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 3105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 3116.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, as in the second pachinko gaming machine, the area of the gaming area 3105 to the left of the center gimmick 3115 is referred to as the left area 3106, and the area to the right of the center gimmick 3115 is referred to as the right area 3107.

A game ball launched by the launching device 6 toward the game area 3105 flows down the left area 3106 or the right area 3107. A game ball flowing down the left area 3106 or the right area 3107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 3100. If the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 3106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launching handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 3107. In other words, the player can hit the game ball toward the left area 3106 by hitting it with the left side, and toward the right area 3107 by hitting it with the right side.

The center device 3115 also has a warp entrance 3117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 3106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 3117 are configured to be guided to a stage 3118 formed in the center device 3115. The stage 3118 is formed below and in front of the display area of the display device 3007 so that the game balls can roll left and right. The stage 3118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 3119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 3118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 3119 are configured to be released directly above the central ball entrance 3128. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 3119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the central ball entrance 3128 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 3117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 3117 but do not enter the chance entrance 3119.

(Central entrance)
The central ball entrance 3128 is disposed directly below the chance entrance 3119 in the center role 3115. A game ball that enters (passes through) the central ball entrance 3128 enters the crown unit 3124.

(General prize entry)
The general winning openings 3122A are arranged in a plurality of locations at the lower left of the game area 3105, and are arranged so that game balls hit from the left can win (game balls hit from the right have difficulty or are impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 3122A, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 3123A (see FIG. 87 described later). The general winning opening 3122B is arranged in one location at the lower right of the game area 3105, and is arranged so that game balls hit from the right that are not captured by the special electric role unit 3130, the normal electric role unit 3145, and the start winning role unit 3150 can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or are impossible to win). Around the general winning opening 3122B, game nails are arranged so that, for example, one ball in every four numbers will win, and when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 3122B, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3123B (see Figure 87 described below).

When the general prize opening switch 3123A (see FIG. 87 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 3122A, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 3122A is not limited to four. When the general prize opening switch 3123B (see FIG. 87 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 3122B, for example, one prize ball is paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 3122B is not limited to one.

(Kroon Unit)
The Krun unit 3124 includes a Krun dish 3210, a first start port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 below), and two pass gate switches 3127A (see FIG. 87 below). The Krun dish 3210 is disposed below the central ball entrance 3128, has a circular shallow concave surface, and one first start port 3120A and two normal start ports 3220 are formed to surround the center of the concave surface. The first start port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 below) is disposed on the transport path of the game ball that has passed through the first start port 3120A, and detects the passage of the game ball. The pass gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 87 below) is disposed on the transport path of the game ball that has passed through the normal start port 3220, and detects the passage of the game ball. In addition, the passing gate switch 3127A (see Figure 87 described below) may be provided at each of the two normal starting ports 3220, or one may be provided at the junction of the transport paths of the game balls that have passed through the two normal starting ports 3220.

The game ball that enters (passes through) the central ball entrance 3128 is released in a circumferential direction onto the outer periphery of the Krun dish 3210. The game ball released onto the Krun dish 3210 circles around the outer periphery of the Krun dish 3210, and as the transfer speed slows down, it moves toward the center of the concave surface while circling. The game ball then passes through either the first start port 3120A or one of the two regular start ports 3220, and is detected by the first start port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 below) or the passing gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 87 below).

When the first start port switch 3121A (see FIG. 87 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a gaming ball into the first start port 3120A, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, a random number value for a symbol of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach for the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol) is extracted, and the various extracted data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). When the start condition is met, the various stored data are used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. When a gaming ball enters the first start port 3120A, for example, three prize balls are paid out.

When the passing gate switch 3127A detects the passage of a gaming ball into the normal symbol start port 3220, various data related to the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol, etc.) is extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of four). The stored various data are used in the process of determining whether the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Note that even if the passing gate switch 3127A detects the passage of a gaming ball into the normal symbol start port 3220, no prize balls are paid out.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 3125 is disposed in the right area 3107, and is a unit body integrating a passing gate 3126 configured to allow a game ball hit to the right to pass through, and a passing gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 87 described later) that detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 3126. The passing gate unit 3125 is disposed below the normal electric role unit 3145, and below the passing gate unit 3125, a special electric role unit 3130, a start winning role unit 3150, and a general winning port 3122B are disposed.

When the passing gate switch 3127B detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 3126, various data related to the normal symbols (e.g., random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are winning) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (e.g., up to four). Note that even if the passing gate switch 3127A detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate unit 3125, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 3125 may also be located in the left area 3106 instead of or in addition to the right area 3107.

The normal game start opening 3220 and the pass gate 3126 may also function as a trigger for activating the continuous operation device of the special feature. In other words, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot game state (such as a normal game state) to a jackpot game state is that both the condition device and the continuous operation device of the special feature are activated, but when a stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, the condition device may be activated but the continuous operation device of the special feature may not be activated. Then, assuming that the condition device is activated, the continuous operation device of the special feature may be activated when a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 87 described below), and a transition to the jackpot game state may be made.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol start port 3220 and the passing gate 3126 is referred to as a start passing, and various data related to the normal symbol extracted by the passage of the game ball through either the normal symbol start port 3220 or the passing gate 3126 (for example, a random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, etc.) is referred to as the normal symbol start information. In addition, storing the normal symbol start information until the start condition is met is referred to as reservation, and the reserved normal symbol start information is also referred to as a "reserved normal symbol ball." In addition, normal symbols may be abbreviated to normal symbols.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning hole 3131 for a big winning, a big winning hole count switch 3132 (see FIG. 87 described later) for detecting the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning hole 3131 for a big winning, and a special electric accessory 3133. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is disposed in the approximate lower right portion of the play area 3105.

The big prize opening 3131 for a big win is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the big prize opening 3131 for a big win, a big prize opening for a big win that can win a game ball hit from the left may be arranged, or a big prize opening for a big win that can win a game ball may be arranged above the center device 3115.

The big jackpot winning opening 3131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) to enter (pass through) when the machine is controlled to a big jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. When the big jackpot winning opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 87 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 3131, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 3131 is not limited to 15.

The special electric device 3133 is equipped with a special electric shutter 3134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 3135 (see FIG. 87 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 3134. The special electric device 3133, i.e., the special electric shutter 3134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass) through the big prize opening 3131 for a big win or an easy state, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the big prize opening 3131 for a big win or a closed state in which it is difficult. The transition of the big prize opening 3131 for a big win from a closed state to an open state in the big win game state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the big prize opening 3131 for a big win transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds. The small win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round in which the big win winning port 3131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time, and differs from the big win game state in that it is not played over multiple rounds. Note that in the small win game state, it is possible to repeat the open and closed states multiple times within a predetermined period of time.

In this embodiment, the large prize opening 3131 for a big win is opened when the big win game control process and the small win game control process are executed, but this is not limited to this. A large prize opening for a small win may be provided separately from the large prize opening 3131 for a big win, and the large prize opening 3131 for a big win may be opened when the big win game control process is executed, and the large prize opening for a small win may be opened when the small win game control process is executed.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 is disposed above the passing gate unit 3125 in the right area 3107 of the play area 3105, and is a unit body integrating a winning hole 3149 through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), a normal electric accessory ball entry switch 3122 (see FIG. 87 described later) that detects the entry of game balls into the winning hole 3149, and a normal electric accessory 3146. In this embodiment, the winning hole 3149 is a normal winning hole, and the switch is a normal winning hole switch.

The normal electric device 3146 is equipped with a normal power shutter 3147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 3148 (see FIG. 87 described later) that operates the normal power shutter 3147. The normal electric device 3146, i.e., the normal power shutter 3147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the winning opening 3149, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning opening 3149. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 3147 that can move back and forth, a movable member consisting of, for example, a pair of blade members, known as a so-called electric tulip, may be used. Furthermore, the movable member is not limited to a pair, and may include a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, etc.

When the normal electric role unit 3145 is arranged on the game panel 3100, a transport path 3540 (see FIG. 82) is formed to transport the game ball captured by the normal electric role 3146 and passing through the winning hole 3149 to the start winning role unit 3150. Details will be described later, but the destination of the game ball captured by the normal electric role 3146 is sorted by the sorting device 3506 (see FIG. 82) to the first passage 3504 (see FIG. 82) toward the first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) or the second passage 3505 (see FIG. 82) toward the second operating mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82), and passes through either the first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) or the second operating mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82). As a result, either the first non-electric role 3440 or the second non-electric role 3441 is in the open state.

(Start-up prize-winning unit)
The start winning role unit 3150 is disposed below the passing gate unit 3125 and above the special electric role 3133 in the area at the lower right side of the play area 3105. The start winning role unit 3150 is equipped with a first non-electric role 3440, a second non-electric role 3441, an outlet 3442, a cover plate 3443, etc., and is a unit body in which these members are integrated. When the start winning role unit 3150 is disposed on the play panel 3100, the first non-electric role 3440 and the second non-electric role 3441 are disposed below the passing gate 3126 in the order of the second non-electric role 3441 and the first non-electric role 3440.

The first non-electric device 3440 includes a blade member 3510 rotatably attached to the main body of the start winning device unit 3150, and a first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) that rotates the blade member 3510 in conjunction with the movement of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 81, the blade member 3510 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and its center is supported so as to be freely rotatable, rotating along the surface of the game panel 3100. The blade member 3510 can be switched by the first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) between an open state in which the game ball can easily land on the inner surface of the blade member 3510, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot easily land on the inner surface of the blade member 3510.

The second non-electric role 3441 includes a blade member 3512 rotatably attached to the main body of the start winning role unit 3150, and a second operating mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82) that rotates the blade member 3512 in conjunction with the movement of the game ball. As shown in FIG. 81, the blade member 3512 is formed in an arc shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and its center is supported rotatably and rotates along the surface of the game panel 3100. The second operating mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82) can be switched between an open state in which the game ball can easily land on the inner surface of the blade member 3512 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot easily land on the inner surface of the blade member 3512.
The first non-electric role 3440 is provided with a first non-electric role operation switch 3514 (see FIG. 87) that detects the opening operation of the blade member 3510. The second non-electric role 3441 is provided with a second non-electric role operation switch 3515 (see FIG. 87) that detects the opening operation of the blade member 3512. When the first start hole switch 3121B or the second start hole switch 3141 detects a game ball, if the first non-electric role operation switch 3514 or the second non-electric role operation switch 3515 has not detected a game ball within a predetermined time before that time, the main CPU 3201 (see FIG. 87) determines that an abnormality has occurred and reserves the transmission of a game abnormality detection command.

The first non-electrical device 3440 and the second non-electrical device 3441 are devices generally called mechachu.

The start winning device unit 3150, the details of which will be described later, further includes a distribution device 3506 (see FIG. 82) that distributes the game ball captured by the normal electric device 3146 to either the first operating mechanism 3511 (see FIG. 82) or the second operating mechanism 3513 (see FIG. 82). Therefore, when the normal electric device 3146 captures a game ball, either the blade member 3510 or the blade member 3512 opens.

The cover plate 3443 is a transparent decorative member that covers the area on the lower right side of the play area 3105. The front of the first non-electric device 3440 and the second non-electric device 3441 are covered by the cover plate 3443. A guide path 3500 extending along a protrusion is formed on the back surface of this cover plate 3443, and when the cover plate 3443 is attached to the play panel 3100, the guide path 3500 is positioned below the passing gate unit 3125.

The guide path 3500 has a sloped portion that extends diagonally to receive the game ball that has fallen from the passing gate unit 3125 side and guide it between the center role 3115 and the start winning role unit 3150, and a guide portion from the bottom end of this sloped portion toward the special electric role 3133 side. The guide portion is formed in three steps, and a hole is formed at the base of each step. Of these two holes, the downstream hole functions as the first start opening 3120B, the central hole functions as the out opening 3442, and the upstream hole functions as the second start opening 3140.

The rotation axis of the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric device 3440 is arranged on the downstream side of the opening of the hole portion that functions as the first starting hole 3120B, and in the closed state, the tip abuts or approaches the upstream side of the opening, thereby closing the first starting hole 3120B by the blade member 3510. In the open state, the tip of the blade member 3510 moves away from the guide path 3500 to open the first starting hole 3120B, and an arc-shaped slope toward the first starting hole 3120B is formed on the blade member 3510. In this way, the blade member 3510 is in a state where it is easy for a game ball to ride on it by opening, and the game ball that has landed on the blade member 3510 moves toward the first starting hole 3120B. In other words, the opening of the blade member 3510 makes it easier for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 3120B.

Similarly, the rotation axis of the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric device 3441 is arranged downstream of the opening of the hole portion that functions as the second starting hole 3140, and in the closed state, the tip of the blade member 3512 abuts or approaches the upstream side of the opening, thereby closing the second starting hole 3140 by the blade member 3512. In the open state, the tip of the blade member 3512 moves away from the guide path 3500 to open the second starting hole 3140, and an arc-shaped slope toward the second starting hole 3140 is formed on the blade member 3512. In this way, the blade member 3512 is in a state where it is easy for a game ball to ride on it by opening, and the game ball that rides on the blade member 3512 moves toward the second starting hole 3140. In other words, the opening of the blade member 3512 makes it easier for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 3140.

The outlet 3442 is disposed between the second non-electric device 3441 and the first non-electric device 3440 on the guide path 3500. Game balls flowing down the guide path 3500 often pass by the outlet 3442, and it is relatively rare for game balls to enter the outlet 3442. Game balls that enter the outlet 3442 are discharged outside the game panel 3100 and do not return to the game area 3105.

When the game ball enters the first start hole 3120B, it is detected by the first start hole switch 3121B (see FIG. 87 described below). Regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start hole 3120A or 3120B, this triggers the process of determining whether the first special symbol has been won.

When the first start port switch 3121B (see FIG. 87 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a gaming ball into the first start port 3120B, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, a random number value for a symbol of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach for the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol) is extracted, and the various extracted data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). When the start condition is met, the various stored data are used in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. When a gaming ball enters the first start port 3120B, for example, three prize balls are paid out.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 3140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 3141 (see FIG. 87 described below). Also, when a game ball enters the second start hole 3140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 3141 (see FIG. 87 described below). Regardless of which of the second start holes 3140 the game ball enters, this triggers the process of determining whether the second special symbol has been won.

When the second start hole switch 3141 (see FIG. 87 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 3140, start information for the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held up to a predetermined number (for example, 1). The held start information is used in the winning determination process for the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start hole 3140, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 3140 is not limited to this.

(Internal configuration of the start winning feature unit 3150)
Here, the main parts of the internal configuration of the start winning feature unit 3150 will be explained with reference to Figure 82.
The start winning gimmick unit 3150 further includes a common passage 3541, a first passage 3504, a second passage 3505, a distribution device 3506, a first operating mechanism 3511, and a second operating mechanism 3513. The common passage 3541 extends vertically downward, and one end of the common passage 3541 is connected to the outlet of the transport path 3540, and the other end of the common passage 3541 branches into a first passage 3504 and a second passage 3505. The first passage 3504 extends diagonally downward relative to the common passage 3541, and the second passage 3505 extends vertically downward in continuation with the common passage 3541.

The first passage 3504, the second passage 3505 and the common passage 3541 are formed by placing a flat plate 3550, on which protrusions 3551-3556 are formed, against the rear surface of the cover plate 3443 with a gap large enough to allow the game balls to pass through. The common passage 3541 is formed between the protrusions 3555 and 3556. The first passage 3504 is formed between the protrusions 3551 and 3552. The second passage 3505 is formed between the protrusions 3553 and 3554.

The protrusions 3555 and 3556 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction at an interval that allows one game ball to pass through. The protrusion 3551 is formed in an obtuse-angled L-shape, extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the protrusion 3555, and further extends along the vertical direction. The protrusion 3554 extends along the vertical direction from the lower end of the protrusion 3555. The protrusions 3552 and 3553 are arranged inside the protrusions 3551 and 3554, and the protrusion 3552 is formed in an obtuse-angled L-shape, extends obliquely downward, and further extends along the vertical direction. The protrusion 3553 extends along the vertical direction. The vertical length of the protrusion 3553 is longer than the length of the part of the protrusion 3552 that extends in the vertical direction, and the upper end of the protrusion 3553 is arranged relative to the lower end of the protrusion 3555 at an interval that allows a game ball to pass through. For this reason, the inlet of first passage 3504 is lower than second passage 3505. In addition, the upper end of protrusion 3553 is connected to the upper end of protrusion 3552, and the portion of protrusion 3552 extending diagonally downward is parallel to the portion of protrusion 3551 extending diagonally downward.
A slit 3557 is formed in the protrusion 3554. This slit 3557 is formed in the protrusion 3554 at a position on an extension line along the inclined surface of the protrusion 3552.

(Distributor)
The sorting device 3506 is disposed in the area between the common passage 3541 and the second passage 3505 .

The distribution device 3506 distributes the game balls that are captured by the normal electric device 3146, pass through the common passage 3541, and fall from the exit of the common passage 3541 to either the first passage 3504 or the second passage 3505.

The sorting device 3506 includes a flat plate member 3531 and a sorting solenoid 3532 (see FIG. 87) that slides the flat plate member 3531 in an oblique direction. The flat plate member 3531 is disposed obliquely above the entrance of the second passage 3505 and has a size that allows the second passage 3505 to be closed. The flat plate member 3531 can also slide in an oblique direction, and the sliding movement can switch between a state in which the entrance of the second passage 3505 is closed and a state in which the entrance of the second passage 3505 is opened.

The main CPU 3201 controls the flow of electricity to the distribution solenoid 3532. When no electricity is flowing to the distribution solenoid 3532, the entrance to the second passage 3505 is closed by the flat member 3531. When electricity is flowing to the distribution solenoid 3532 to change the solenoid iron core, the flat member 3531 moves diagonally upward, opening the entrance to the second passage 3505. At this time, almost the entire flat member 3531 moves outward.

Since the cover plate 3443 is made of a transparent material, the player can see the operation of the flat plate member 3531 and the way the game balls are distributed by the distribution device 3506.

[Operation of sorting device 3506]
Fig. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement path of a game ball when the current to the sorting device 3506 is OFF. Fig. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement path of a game ball when the current to the sorting device 3506 is ON. Fig. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the face of the game panel 3100 when the game ball has passed through the first operating mechanism 3511. Fig. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the face of the game panel 3100 when the game ball has passed through the second operating mechanism 3513.

When the power supply to the distribution device 3506 is off, the second passage 3505 is closed by the distribution device 3506 as shown in FIG. 83. In this state, when the normal electric role 3146 captures a game ball, the game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511 as shown in FIG. 83, and the first operating mechanism 3511 is linked to the passage of the game ball, and the blade member 3510 (see FIG. 81) of the first non-electric role 3440 (see FIG. 81), which is in the closed state, switches to the open state as shown in FIG. 85. Note that, when the blade member 3510 is in the open state and the game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511, the blade member 3510 remains in the open state. When the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric role 3440 captures one game ball in the open state, the open state is maintained, and when the second game ball is captured, the blade member 3510 closes. In addition, when the first non-electric device 3440 is in the open state and captures two game balls at the same time, or when it captures one game ball and then captures two game balls at the same time, it becomes in the closed state. In addition, the blade member 3510 of the first non-electric device 3440 is in the open state and captures two game balls, but it may be in the closed state when it captures one game ball.

When the distribution device 3506 is energized, the second passage 3505 is open as shown in FIG. 84. In this state, when the normal electric role 3146 captures a game ball, the game ball passes through the second operating mechanism 3513, and the second operating mechanism 3513 switches the blade member 3512 (see FIG. 81) of the second non-electric role 3441 (see FIG. 81), which is in the closed state, to the open state as shown in FIG. 86 in conjunction with the passage of the game ball. Note that when the blade member 3512 is in the open state and the game ball passes through the second operating mechanism 3513, the blade member 3512 remains in the open state. When the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric role 3441 captures one game ball in the open state, the open state is maintained, and when the second game ball is captured, the blade member 3512 becomes closed. In addition, the second non-electric device 3441 also switches to the closed state when it captures two game balls at the same time in the open state, or when it switches to the open state and captures one game ball and then captures two game balls at the same time. In addition, the blade member 3512 of the second non-electric device 3441 switches to the closed state when it captures two game balls in the open state, but it may also switch to the closed state when it captures one ball.

When the first start port switch 3121B (see FIG. 87) or the second start port switch 3141 (see FIG. 87) detects the game balls captured by the first non-electric device 3440 or the second non-electric device 3441, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the player as prize balls. Also, when the normal electric device ball entry switch 3122 (see FIG. 87) detects the game balls, a predetermined number of game balls are awarded to the player as prize balls. In other words, when the game balls are captured by the normal electric shutter 3147 of the normal electric device 3146, prize balls are awarded to the player. In the fourth pachinko game machine, the game ball captured by the normal power shutter 3147 of the normal electric device 3146 always passes through the normal electric device ball entry switch 3122 after being captured, and the normal electric device ball entry switch 3122 detects the game ball and awards the prize ball to the player, so the capture of the game ball by the normal electric device 3146 also means winning. Furthermore, even if the game ball is distributed to the first passage 3504 or the second passage 3505 by the distribution device 3506, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the first start hole 3120B or the second start hole 3140, so the player is given the opportunity to win a prize ball.

In the fourth pachinko game machine described above, the normal electric device 3146, the second non-electric device 3441, and the first non-electric device 3440 are arranged in this order from the upstream side, but the order of these three devices does not matter as long as they are arranged in the right area 3107 of the play area 3105.

(Outlet)
In FIG. 81, the outlet 3178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 3105 but have not won any of the various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 3120A, 3120B, the second starting hole 3140, the big winning hole 3131 for big wins, the general winning holes 3122A, 3122B, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 3178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 3105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 3178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, below the general winning hole 3122B or on the Klune plate 3210, so that game balls flowing down the game area 3105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 3010, as in the second pachinko game machine, and is provided behind the transparent game panel 3100, as described above. This back unit includes a group of performance-use accessories 3058, such as movable accessories, controlled by a sub-control circuit 3300 (see FIG. 87, described later). The group of performance-use accessories 3058 is arranged around the display area of the display device 3007. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 3058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Fig. 87 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 87, the fourth pachinko game machine is mainly composed of a main control circuit 3200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 3300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 3400, and a power supply circuit 3450.

[5-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 3200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on and processing related to game operations, and is equipped with a main CPU 3201, a main ROM 3202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 3203 (read/write memory), an initial reset circuit 3204, and a backup capacitor 3207, and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 3201 is connected to the main ROM 3202, the main RAM 3203, the initial reset circuit 3204, etc. The main CPU 3201 has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (WDT) that monitors operation and a function for preventing fraud.

The main ROM 3202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the fourth pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 3201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 3201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 3202.

The main RAM 3203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game. This main RAM 3203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 3201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 3201, this is not limiting and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The initial reset circuit 3204 monitors the main CPU 3201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 3207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 3203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 3200 also includes an I/O port 3205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 3206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 3300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 3300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 3200. For example, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 3161, normal symbol reserved display unit 3162, first special symbol display unit 3163, second special symbol display unit 3164, first special symbol reserved display unit 3165, second special symbol reserved display unit 3166, normal power solenoid 3148, special power solenoid 3135, distribution solenoid 3532, etc. are connected to the main control circuit 3200. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 3170 and error notification monitor 3172, etc. are also connected to the main control circuit 3200. The main control circuit 3200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 3205.

The performance display monitor 3170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 3201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 3172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 3172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described below. Note that the setting change code may be displayed as a pattern that is not normally displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 3200 is also connected to the first start port switches 3121A, 3121B, the second start port switch 3141, the pass gate switches 3127A, 3127B, the big win port count switch 3132, the normal electric role ball entry switch 3122, the general win port switches 3123A, 3123B, the first non-electric role operation switch 3514, and the second non-electric role operation switch 3515. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to the main control circuit 3200 via the I/O port 3205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 3200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 3184 used to send data to a hall computer 3186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key 3174 that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a backup clear switch 3176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 3203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 3176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the game arcade. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176, so that the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key 3174 and/or the backup clear switch 3176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176 are connected to the main control circuit 3200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 3400 or the power supply circuit 3450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key 3174 and the backup clear switch 3176.

[5-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 3300 includes a sub-CPU 3301, a program ROM 3302, a work RAM 3303, a display control circuit 3304, a sound control circuit 3305, an LED control circuit 3306, a role control circuit 3307, and a command input port 3308. The sub-control circuit 3300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 3200. Although not shown in Fig. 87, the sub-control circuit 3300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 3302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the fourth pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 3301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 3301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 3302. In particular, the sub-CPU 3301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 3200.

The work RAM 3303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 3301.

The display control circuit 3304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 3007. The display control circuit 3304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 3304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 3007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 3301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 3007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 3304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 3007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 3007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 3007. In this way, the display control circuit 3304 can control the display device 3007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 3305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 3305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 3301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 3306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 3306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 3307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of performance reels 58). The reel control circuit 3307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a reel data ROM in which operation patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 3307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 3301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 3301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 3308 is connected to the command output port 3206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 3200.

The payout/launch control circuit 3400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 82 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 6 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 3180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 3400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 3200, it sends a specified signal to the payout device 3082 and controls the payout device 3082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 3182 is connected to the card unit 3180. The ball lending operation panel 3182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 3180. The payout/launch control circuit 3400 controls the payout device 3082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 3180. The operation panel 3182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 3180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 3400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 3450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 3200, the sub control circuit 3300, the payout/launch control circuit 3400, etc.

The power supply circuit 3450 is connected to a power switch 3095 and other components. The power switch 3095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 3200, the sub control circuit 3300, the payout/launch control circuit 3400, etc.).

The game flow of the fourth pachinko game machine is similar to that of the first pachinko game machine shown in Figure 7, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

[5-3. Basic specifications of the fourth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the fourth pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.
In the fourth pachinko game machine, a normal game state (sometimes abbreviated as normal state) in which neither the probability variable control nor the time-saving control is executed, a high probability time-saving game state in which both the probability variable control and the time-saving control are executed, and a low probability time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is not executed but the time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 3201 is capable of progressing the game in any of these game states. However, the game states progressed by the control of the main CPU 3201 are not limited to these, and a high probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability variable control is executed but the time-saving control is not executed may be added. Furthermore, any of the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, the high probability non-time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state may not be progressed. For example, the game may be progressed in any of the normal game state, the high probability time-saving game state, and the low probability time-saving game state, and the game may not be progressed in the high probability non-time-saving game state.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, as a time-saving control, when a certain condition is satisfied, control is performed to activate time-saving a, time-saving b, and time-saving c. The details of time-saving a, time-saving b, and time-saving c will be described later.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, left hitting is recommended in the normal game state, and right hitting is recommended in the high-probability time-saving game state and low-probability time-saving game state. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the recommended hitting method, for example, in the display area of the display device 4007. Note that even if a transition is made from a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state to a normal game state or a high-probability non-time-saving game state, if it is determined that the state will immediately transition back to a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state, a display recommending right hitting may be displayed even in the normal game state or the high-probability non-time-saving game state.

[Big hit, small hit probability]
In the fourth pachinko game machine, when the main CPU 3201 detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 3120A, 3120B, it extracts a random number for determining a jackpot of the first special pattern from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter referred to as the first special pattern lottery, or special pattern 1 lottery), and makes a jackpot determination for the extracted random number for determining a jackpot by referring to a hit determination table (not shown) for the first special pattern stored in the main RAM 3203.

In addition, when the main CPU 3201 detects that a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 440, it extracts a random number for determining a jackpot for the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol lottery, or special symbol 2 lottery), and performs a jackpot determination for the extracted random number for determining a jackpot by referring to a hit determination table (not shown) for the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 3203.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the probability of a big win being determined in the first special symbol drawing is about 1/319 in a low probability state and about 1/99 in a high probability state. The probability of a small win being determined in the first special symbol drawing is 0. The probability of a big win being determined in the second special symbol drawing is 0, and the probability of a small win being determined is about 317/319 in a low probability state and about 97/99 in a high probability state. Here, according to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, since there is no function to support winning in the second starting hole 3140 by operating the normal electric role 3146, so-called electric chute support, it is difficult to win in the second starting hole 3140. In addition, although details will be described later, in the high probability time-saving game state, even if the normal electric role 3146 captures the game ball, the first non-electric role 3440 opens, making it easier for the game ball to enter the first start hole 3120, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start hole 3140. In this way, since it is difficult to enter the second start hole 3140 in the high probability state, it is designed so that a small win is unlikely to occur in the high probability state of the probability change state. In addition, the hit determination table of the second special symbol of the fourth pachinko game machine may include a big win, and for example, it may be set so that a big win is won at about 1/319 in the low probability state and about 1/99 in the high probability state. In addition, according to the fourth pachinko game machine, the result of the second special symbol lottery is almost always a small win, and there is no need for a performance that makes you expect a transition to a small win game state, so that a short-time change pattern is easily determined as the change pattern of the second special symbol in order to smoothly progress the game.

When the game transitions to the jackpot game state due to a jackpot win in the special drawing, a round game of "10" rounds is played. One round ends when 10 game balls have won or the opening time has elapsed for 30 seconds, and this round is repeated 10 times. When the game transitions to the small jackpot game state due to a small jackpot win in the special drawing, the jackpot large winning hole 3131 is opened 10 times. The opening time for each time is set so that one game ball can win.

[Number of balls awarded]
If the big winning opening 3131 for a big win is won, 15 game balls are paid out. If the first starting opening 3120A or 3120B is won, 4 game balls are paid out. If the second starting opening 3140 is won, 15 game balls are paid out. If the big winning opening 3131 for a big win is won, 15 game balls are paid out. If the general winning opening 3122A is won, 4 game balls are paid out. If the general winning opening 3122B is won, 1 game ball is paid out. If the normal electric device 3146 is won, 1 game ball is paid out.

[Time-saving play]
In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the game enters a time-saving state when any of the following three conditions is satisfied.
・After the big win ends (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "time reduction")
When the number of lotteries related to the operation of the condition device, i.e., the number of times the special pattern changes, reaches the specified number of operations n (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as b time reduction)
・When the combination of special symbols is a predetermined combination that is not a jackpot (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as c time reduction)

(a) Shortened working hours
In the case of the a time reduction, the number of time reductions N can be set arbitrarily. However, in the case of the b time reduction, it is desirable that the number of time reductions N in the low probability time reduction game state is set to a number at which the b time reduction does not operate (for example, less than the number of times it operates n). In the fourth pachinko game machine, after the big win, the game moves to the high probability time reduction game state, and the number of time reductions of "160 times" is granted.

(b) Time saving
In the case of time reduction, the number of operations n shall be within the following range.
2.5/ML≦n≦3.0/ML (ML is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability in a low probability state)
In addition, the number of times n of operation is always counted during low probability regardless of the presence or absence of time reduction. In addition, it is preferable not to count the number of times the special chart changes during high probability, but this does not exclude counting the number of times the special chart changes during high probability in the present invention.
There are three clear patterns for the number of activations n:
When the RAM is cleared When the RAM is cleared due to a setting change When the condition device is activated or terminated The number of activations n is counted by adding together special chart 1 and special chart 2. In other words, even if there are special charts 1 and 2, it is not possible to count only special chart 1 or only special chart 2. Also, in the case of pachinko machines with setting functions, it is not possible to determine the value of the number of activations n for each setting. Note that b time reduction is sometimes called ceiling time reduction because it activates after the number of activations n is reached, which is similar to the ceiling function in pachinko slot machines.
The number of time-saving times N can be set as appropriate, but it is desirable that it is within the range of N≦3.8/ML. Here, it is desirable that the number of time-saving times N cannot be set to a plurality of number-of-times patterns, such as 100 times, 200 times, etc., but this does not exclude the setting of a plurality of number-of-times patterns in the present invention. In addition, although it is possible for the winning probability of the normal drawing to transition to a high probability state, it is desirable not to transition to the high probability state. However, this invention does not exclude the transition of the normal drawing to a high probability state. For example, even if the normal drawing is in a high probability state, if the winning probability is not much different from the winning probability in the normal game state, it may be transitioned to the high probability state.
In the fourth pachinko game machine, since 1/ML is about 319, the number of times of operation n is set to, for example, 850 times, and the number of times of time reduction N can be set to, for example, a value of "1200 times" or less after the number of times of operation n is reached. In the fourth pachinko game machine, when the b time reduction is activated, the number of times of time reduction N is set to "1200 times", and in combination with that, the special chart 2 variation "1 time" is given. In other words, the end condition of the b time reduction is when either the special chart 1 variation "1200 times" or the special chart 2 variation "1 time" is satisfied. In the time reduction state (b time reduction), the normal chart variation is performed at a higher speed than in the normal state, or an opening pattern with a longer opening time of the normal electric role 3146 is likely to be selected, and the normal electric average opening time becomes longer.

In addition, there is no need to display a special symbol when the specified number of activations n is reached; if there is a miss, a miss symbol will be displayed, and if there is a small win, a small win symbol will be displayed. Also, the variation pattern of the special symbol when the number of activations n is reached can only be selected as a special variation pattern in the variation pattern table selected after a win. Also, if a small win is won when the number of activations n is reached, it is necessary to activate both the time reduction and the small win. Also, if both b time reduction and c time reduction are established at the same time, it is necessary to determine which one to prioritize using the program.

(c) Time-saving
The c time reduction is activated after a combination of specific special symbols is displayed. The c time reduction is only effective when the special symbol lottery is in a low probability non-time reduction state. In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is impossible to determine the winning probability of the time reduction symbol for each setting. The transition to the c time reduction is determined by lottery using a jackpot random number. The number of time reductions N associated with the winning of the time reduction symbol can be set appropriately, but it is desirable to set it within the range of N≦3.8/ML. However, it is desirable not to set multiple number patterns (e.g., time reduction 20 times, 50 times, etc.) in the b time reduction, but it is possible to set multiple number patterns (e.g., time reduction 20 times, 50 times, etc.) in the c time reduction, and the number of times in the multiple number patterns may be determined using a jackpot random number or a pattern random number of the time reduction symbol. In addition, the lottery probability of the symbol that transitions to the c time reduction may be different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. In addition, it is desirable not to shift the winning probability of the normal drawing to a high probability state after the display of a combination of specific special symbols that results in a time reduction c. Even if the normal drawing is in a high probability state, if the winning probability is not much different from the winning probability in the normal game state (for example, the normal drawing winning probability in the normal game state is 1/200, and the normal drawing winning probability in the high probability state is 1/199.2), the normal drawing may be shifted to the high probability state.

For b time reduction and c time reduction, in addition to the number of time reductions N (the sum of the number of times Special Chart 1 changes and the number of times Special Chart 2 changes), it is possible to use the number of times Special Chart 2 changes, the number of small wins, etc. as the conditions for ending the time reduction.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, since 1/ML is about 319, the number of time-saving times N can be set to a value of, for example, "1200 times" or less after the combination of time-saving patterns is displayed. In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the c time-saving is activated, the number of time-saving times N is set to "1200 times", and in combination with that, a special chart 2 change "1 time" is granted. In other words, the end condition of the c time-saving is when either the special chart 1 change "1200 times" or the special chart 2 change "1 time" is met. In the time-saving state (c time-saving), the normal chart change is performed faster than in the normal state, or an opening pattern with a longer opening time of the normal electric role 3146 is more likely to be selected, and the average normal electric opening time is longer.

For the convenience of the following explanation, the state in which the time-saving feature a is activated may be referred to as the time-saving feature a state, the state in which the time-saving feature b is activated as the time-saving feature b state, and the state in which the time-saving feature c is activated as the time-saving feature c state. In addition, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the time-saving feature a, the time-saving feature b, and the time-saving feature c have different times of time-saving, while the time-saving feature b and the time-saving feature c have the same times of time-saving, the normal figure change time during time-saving, and the probability of winning the normal figure, and perform the same operations. Therefore, the time-saving feature a, the time-saving feature b, and the time-saving feature c may be collectively referred to as the time-saving game state, and further, the time-saving feature a may be collectively referred to as the first time-saving game state, and the time-saving feature b and the time-saving feature c may be collectively referred to as the second time-saving game state.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the time-saving game state ends when the special symbols start to change due to the last time-saving number of times. Note that the time-saving game state may also end when the special symbols start to change due to the last time-saving number of times.

The fourth pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machine, but it is also possible to install the b and c time reductions on so-called type 1/2 type pachinko gaming machines such as the third pachinko. However, in the case of a type 1/2 type pachinko gaming machine, it does not have a high probability game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation time, normal pattern stop time, and winning probability of the normal pattern lottery are the same in the normal state, the a time reduction game state, the b time reduction game state, and the c time reduction game state.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, the a time reduction can be activated via a jackpot when it overlaps with the a time reduction, the b time reduction, or the c time reduction. The b time reduction cannot be activated when it overlaps with the a time reduction or the b time reduction, but can be activated when it overlaps with the c time reduction. However, it is necessary to match the performance of the b time reduction and the c time reduction (the normal map fluctuation time, the normal map stop time, the normal power opening time, the normal map probability, etc.). The c time reduction cannot be activated when it overlaps with the a time reduction, the b time reduction, or the c time reduction. If the time reductions are not overlapped, even if one time reduction is established during the other time reduction, the establishment of the other time reduction is ignored. When the time reductions are overlapped, if one time reduction is established during the other time reduction, the number of time reductions will be the number of time reductions with the greater number of fluctuations. When time-saving features overlap, if one time-saving feature is activated while the other is activated, the performance of the one time-saving feature that was activated will be maintained regardless of the number of changes. Note that in this invention, if one time-saving feature is activated while the other is activated, the other time-saving feature may be activated.

[Operation patterns of normal electric props and distribution devices]
Figure 88 is a time chart showing the operation pattern of the normal electric device 3146 and the distribution pattern of the distribution device 3506 when the normal pattern lottery is won, where Figure 88(a) shows the pattern in the normal state (hereinafter referred to as opening pattern 1), Figure 88(b) shows the pattern in the a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as opening pattern 2), and Figure 88(c) shows the pattern in the b time-saving state and the c time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as opening pattern 3).
In the case where the normal pattern lottery is won in the normal state, the normal electric role 3146 repeats opening and closing operations as shown in FIG. 88(a), and opens 10 times within a predetermined time. It is in a closed state from the end of the opening to the start of the next opening, and the time in the closed state is set longer than the opening time. As shown in FIG. 88(a), the distribution device 3506 is turned on when the normal electric role 3146 is in an open state. In other words, in the normal state, when the normal pattern lottery is won and the normal electric role 3146 captures a game ball, the second operating mechanism 3513 is operated and the second non-electric role 3441 is in an open state, so that the special pattern 2 lottery is easily performed.

When the normal symbol lottery is won in the time-saving state a, the normal electric device 3146 opens nine times within a specified time, as shown in FIG. 88(b). The opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is the reverse of the timing of opening and closing in the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 shown in FIG. 88(a). The distribution device 3506 has the same distribution pattern as in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 88(b). In other words, in the time-saving state a, when the normal symbol lottery is won and the normal electric device 3146 captures the game ball, the first operating mechanism 3511 is activated and the first non-electric device 3440 is opened, making it easier to draw the special symbol 1.

In addition, in the time-saving state a, if the normal lottery is won, the opening time of the normal electric device 3146 becomes longer than in the normal state, making it easier for the normal electric device 3146 to capture the game ball.

When the normal symbol lottery is won in the b time-saving state or the c time-saving state, the normal electric device 3146 opens once and then closes, as shown in FIG. 88(c). The distribution device 3506 opens at the same time that the normal electric device 3146 opens. In other words, in the b time-saving state and the c time-saving state, when the normal symbol lottery is won and the normal electric device 3146 captures the game ball, the second operating mechanism 3513 is activated and the second non-electric device 3441 is opened, making it easier to draw the special symbol 2.

The timing of energizing the distribution device 3506 may be delayed by the time it takes for the game ball captured by the normal electric device 3146 to reach the distribution device 3506. This makes it possible to reliably distribute game balls captured by the normal electric device 3146 in the normal state to the second operating mechanism 3513 side (special chart 2 side), and game balls captured by the normal electric device 3146 in the time-saving state a to the first operating mechanism 3511 side (special chart 1 side).

In order to perform a normal drawing in the normal state, the player must either hit from the left and cause the game ball to enter the normal drawing start hole 3220 of the crown unit 3124, or hit from the right and cause the game ball to enter the passing gate 3126. According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the game board unit 3010 is configured so that hitting from the left in the normal state results in a higher base than hitting from the right. For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to hit from the left in the normal state.

[General election under normal circumstances]
89 is a time chart showing state transitions of the normal electric role 3146, the distribution device 3506, the second non-electric role activation switch 3515, the second non-electric role 3441, and the big win opening 3131 when a normal winning is made in the normal state. In the fourth embodiment, when a normal winning is made in the normal state, a game ball may enter the normal starting opening 3220 of the crane unit 3124.

For example, when a game ball enters the normal pattern start hole 3220 of the Krun unit 3124, the normal pattern changes and stops. When the normal pattern stops in a winning state, the normal electric role 3146 opens. At this time, when the normal electric role 3146 captures the game ball, the distribution device 3506 is energized, so the game ball is distributed to the special pattern 2 side, and immediately after the second non-electric role operation switch 3515 detects the game ball, the second non-electric role 3441 opens. The second non-electric role 3441 captures two game balls and closes. By the second non-electric role 3441 capturing two game balls, two game balls enter the second start hole 3140. Since there is a high probability of winning a small prize when the second start hole 3140 is won, a small prize game is played twice. Specifically, the big prize winning opening 3131 for big prizes is opened 10 times in one small prize game, so that it is opened 20 times in total. The opening time for one time is set to the extent that one game ball can be captured. In other words, the interval from the opening and closing of the normal electric role 3146 to the start of the next opening is set to the time that the big prize winning opening 3131 for big prizes can be opened 20 times. After two small prize games are finished, the second opening of the normal electric role 3146 is performed. After the second opening of the normal electric role 3146, two small prize games are performed in the same way as the first time. Since the opening of the normal electric role 3146 is performed 10 times, two small prize games are repeated 10 times.
In this way, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the normal state and the game transitions to the normal symbol winning game, 20 small winning games in which 10 game balls can be won are executed, so that the normal symbol winning game is executed for a relatively long time.

[Normal winning in a time-saving state]
In the time-saving state a, the game is played by hitting the right hand to enter the passing gate 3126 as described above. In the time-saving state a, when the normal drawing is won, the distribution device 3506 operates in a pattern in which the timing of opening and closing of the opening pattern of the normal electric role 3146 is reversed. Therefore, since the distribution device 3506 is not energized when the normal electric role 3146 captures the game ball, as shown in FIG. 83, the game ball is distributed to the special drawing 1 side, and the first non-electric role 3440 is opened immediately after the first non-electric role operation switch 3514 is turned on. Then, the first non-electric role 3440 captures two game balls and is closed. The game ball captured by the first non-electric role 3440 enters the first starting hole 3120B. Then, if the special drawing 1 lottery is won, a jackpot game is executed.

If a jackpot game is won during a normal symbol hit game, the normal symbol hit game is forced to end. This makes it possible to avoid an incident in which the normal electric device 3146 captures the game ball before it flows down to the jackpot big prize opening 3131 during a jackpot game, and the jackpot big prize opening 3131 is unable to capture the game ball.

In addition, in the time-saving state a, the normal electric device 3146 is open for a longer period of time, and the normal electric device 3146 captures many game balls, but on the other hand, since the normal electric device 3146 captures game balls upstream, it becomes difficult for game balls to flow down to the first non-electric device 3440. For this reason, when the normal electric device 3146 captures multiple game balls, the first game ball opens the first non-electric device 3440, but since it is difficult for game balls to flow down to the first non-electric device 3440, it is difficult for the first non-electric device 3440 to close. Therefore, even if the next game ball passes through the first operating mechanism 3511, the first non-electric device 3440 remains in the open state, and when the normal electric device 3146 is closed, the game ball that was not captured by the normal electric device 3146 enters the first non-electric device 3440, causing the first non-electric device 3440 to close. As a result, in the a-time-saving state, as in the normal state, the first non-electric device 3440 captures two game balls with one opening of the normal electric device 3146.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 3201 of the main control circuit 3200 are obtained by adding or modifying some of the processes performed in the main control main processing (see Figures 13 to 16).
Specifically, the following processes have been added or modified:
Next to the normal symbol control process performed at S40 shown in Fig. 16, as shown in Fig. 90, a distribution device control process performed at S4010 and a non-electric role management process performed at S4020 are added. The distribution device control process will be described later with reference to Fig. 91. The non-electric role management process manages the state of the first non-electric role 3440 and the second non-electric role 3441 based on the state of the first non-electric role operation switch 3514 or the second non-electric role operation switch 3515, and if an abnormality is detected, a game abnormality detection command is sent to the main CPU 3201.

The fourth pachinko gaming machine also executes a game state management process performed in S1030 shown in FIG. 53. In this process, the main CPU 3201 performs an update process for the probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc. In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, there are a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) and a second time-saving game state (b time-saving or c time-saving), so when the transition condition to the first time-saving game state is satisfied, the first time-saving flag is turned on, and when the termination condition of the first time-saving game state is satisfied, the first time-saving flag is turned off. Similarly, when the transition condition to the second time-saving game state is satisfied, the second time-saving flag is turned on, and when the termination condition of the second time-saving game state is satisfied, the second time-saving flag is turned off.

The second pachinko game machine executes the processes in S146 to S148 shown in FIG. 25. In these processes, in the first pachinko game machine, in the event of a big win, the special electric device 1133 is driven to open the big win large prize opening 1131, and in the event of a small win, the small win solenoid 1154 is driven to open the small win large prize opening 1151. According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 3201 controls the special electric device 3133 to open the big win large prize opening 3131 in both the event of a big win and a small win.

In addition, according to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the variable display start process for normal symbols, which is performed in S213 shown in FIG. 30, has been partially changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93.

In the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the other processes other than those described above are the same as those in the second embodiment. Therefore, a description of the other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will be omitted.

(Distributor control process)
The subroutine (sorting device control process) executed in step S4010 in FIG. 90 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S4030, if the control state number of the normal symbol is a value (3) indicating the release of a normal electric prize, the main CPU 3201 transfers processing to step S4031, and if the control state number is not a value (3) indicating the release of a normal electric prize, the main CPU 3201 ends this subroutine.

In step S4031, the main CPU 3201 sets a control signal for driving the distribution solenoid 3121 in the main RAM 3203 based on a distribution pattern as shown in FIG. 88 stored in the main RAM 3203. This control signal is output from each port in step S45, whereby solenoid power is supplied to the distribution solenoid 3121 (see FIG. 87) and the distribution device 3506 is driven. When this process ends, this subroutine ends. Note that the distribution device control process may be executed, for example, in the normal electric role release process in step S216 (see FIG. 30).

[Normal symbol variable display start process]
The subroutine (regular symbol variable display start processing) executed in step S213 of FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 92, in step S4041, the main CPU 3201 determines whether the normal control state number is a value (0) indicating variable display start processing of normal patterns. If the normal control state number is a value (0) indicating variable display start processing of normal patterns, the main CPU 3201 proceeds to processing of step S4042, and if the normal control state number is not a value (0) indicating variable display start processing of normal patterns, the main CPU 3201 ends this subroutine.

In step S4042, the main CPU 3201 determines whether the value of the normal symbol reserved memory count data (reserved number) stored in the main RAM 3203 is "0". If the value of the normal symbol reserved memory count data (reserved number) is not "0", the process proceeds to step S4043, and if the value of the normal symbol reserved memory count data (reserved number) is "0", the process proceeds to step S4051.

In step S4043, it is determined whether the first time-saving flag is on. In this process, if the main CPU 3201 determines that the first time-saving flag is on, it transfers the process to step S4044. On the other hand, if the main CPU 3201 determines that the first time-saving flag is not on, that is, if it determines that the game is not in the first time-saving game state, it transfers the process to step S4045.

In step S4044, a process is performed to determine whether or not there is a high probability of a normal symbol winning. In this process, the main CPU 3201 refers to a winning determination table with a high probability of winning, and determines whether or not the winning determination value stored in the winning determination table matches the random number value for determining a normal symbol winning, which is included in the start memory and extracted when the gaming ball passes through the passing gate switches 3127A and 3127B. If there is a match, it is a win, and if there is no match, it is a loss. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S4046.

In step S4045, a process is performed to determine whether a normal symbol wins with a low probability. In this process, the main CPU 3201 refers to a win determination table with a low winning probability, and determines whether the win determination value stored in the win determination table matches the random number value for determining a normal symbol win, which is included in the start memory and extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate switches 3127A and 3127B. If they match, it is a win, and if they do not match, it is a loss. In other words, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the first time-saving game state is high, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the normal state and the second time-saving game state is low. When this process is completed, the process moves to step S4046.

In step S4046, an opening pattern setting process is executed. Details will be described later, but in this process, the main CPU 3201 sets the opening pattern of the normal electric feature 3146 shown in FIG. 88, i.e., the drive pattern of the normal electric solenoid 3148. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S4047.

In step S4047, the main CPU 3201 sets a normal symbol presentation start command in the main RAM 3203. The normal symbol presentation start command is supplied to the sub-control circuit 3300 by the main CPU 3201 of the main control circuit 3200. The normal symbol presentation start command includes data such as the game state, variation time, normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the normal electric role device 3146. The sub-CPU 3301 of the sub-control circuit 3300 will start the presentation based on the received normal symbol presentation start command. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S4048.

In step S4048, the main CPU 3201 sets the waiting time (e.g., 5 seconds) in the normal symbol waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S4049.

In step S4049, the main CPU 3201 sets the normal control state number to a value (1) indicating the end of the normal variable symbol display. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S4050.

In step S4050, the main CPU 3201 clears the memory area used for the current change. When this process is complete, this subroutine ends.

In step S4051, the main CPU 3201 performs normal symbol demo display processing. When this processing is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Opening pattern setting process]
The subroutine (opening pattern setting process) executed in step S4046 in FIG. 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S4061, a process is performed to determine whether or not the current game state is in the second time-shortened game state. In this process, the main CPU 3201 performs a process to determine whether or not the current game state is in the second time-shortened game state, depending on the presence or absence of the second time-shortened game flag. If it is determined that the current game state is in the second time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S4062. If it is not determined that the current game state is in the second time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S4063.

In step S4062, the main CPU 3201 performs a process of determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 to be an opening pattern that makes it easier to guide the game ball to the second non-electric device 3441, that is, opening pattern 3 shown in FIG. 88 as the opening pattern. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S4063, a process is performed to determine whether or not the first time-shortened game state is in effect. In this process, the main CPU 3201 performs a process to determine whether or not the current game state is in the first time-shortened game state, depending on the presence or absence of the first time-shortened game flag. If it is determined that the current game state is in the first time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S4064. If it is not determined that the current game state is in the first time-shortened game state, the process proceeds to step S4065.

In step S4064, the main CPU 3201 performs a process to determine the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 to be an opening pattern that makes it easier to guide the game ball to the first non-electric device 3440, that is, opening pattern 2 shown in FIG. 88 as the opening pattern. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S4065, the main CPU 3201 performs a process to determine the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 to be an opening pattern that makes it easier to guide the game ball to the second non-electric device 3441, that is, opening pattern 1 shown in FIG. 88 as the opening pattern. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[5-5. Game state transition]
FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of game states during play using the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In most cases, the game starts in the normal state at the beginning of the game. In the normal state, the ball is hit from the left and the game proceeds with the aim of entering the central ball entrance 3128. When the game ball enters the central ball entrance 3128, the game ball moves to the croon plate 3210 and passes through either the first starting hole 3120A or the normal starting hole 3220. The passing of the game ball through the first starting hole 3120A triggers a special drawing 1 lottery, and if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the game moves to the jackpot game state (first bonus). As mentioned above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery is 1/319, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is 10 rounds. In addition, one round ends when 10 game balls have entered or 30 seconds have elapsed since the opening time, and 15 balls are awarded for entering the big win opening 3131, so the total number of balls that can be won by playing a big win is approximately 1,500.

After the jackpot game state (first bonus) entered by winning the jackpot in the special chart 1 lottery ends, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special chart 1 lottery transitions to a high probability state of 1/99.9, and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 160 time-saving cycles. If a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the game transitions to the jackpot game state (first bonus), and after the jackpot game state (first bonus) ends, the special chart 1 lottery transitions to a high probability state and the time-saving cycle is reset to 160 times. When all 160 time-saving cycles have been used up, the game transitions to the normal state (low probability non-time-saving state).

When the number of times the special chart changes in the low probability state of the special chart lottery (the combined number of times the special chart 1 changes and the number of times the special chart 2 changes) reaches 850 times, the game moves to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), and the combined number of times the special chart 1 changes and the special chart 2 changes is "1200 times" and the special chart 2 changes "1 time" are awarded as the number of time-saving times. Also, if the stopping mode of the special chart when the jackpot is not won in the special chart lottery is a special mode, the game moves to the second time-saving game state (c time-saving), and the combined number of times the special chart 1 changes and the special chart 2 changes is "1200 times" and the special chart 2 changes "1 time" are awarded as the number of time-saving times.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, since the passing gate 3126 is located in the right area 3107, when the game transitions to the b time-saving state, the player will play by hitting the ball to the right. At this time, if the normal drawing is won when the game ball passes through the passing gate 3126 and the normal electric device 3146 is activated to capture the game ball, the game ball will enter the second starting hole 3140 as a start prize. Therefore, the number of time-saving times in the b time-saving state is effectively one.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the stopping patterns of the multiple types of special symbols that result in a small win include a special mode. Here, in the fourth pachinko game machine, since there is no small win in the special symbol 1 lottery and there is a small win in the special symbol 2 lottery, the combination of the stopped symbols in the special symbol 1 variation does not result in a special mode. For this reason, the c time-saving state can be transitioned to the b time-saving state. Even when transitioning to the c time-saving state, the player will play by hitting the right side as in the b time-saving state, and it will be easier to start winning at the second start hole 3140, so the number of time-saving times in the c time-saving state will effectively be one. In this way, the number of time-saving times in the second time-saving game state in the fourth pachinko game machine is effectively "one time".

In the second time-saving game state, a start entry into the second start hole 3140 becomes possible, and most of the special chart 2 lotteries result in small wins, so the small win game is executed after the special chart 2 variation stops. Furthermore, if the stop pattern of the small win is a special pattern, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state) and the small win game is executed. After the small win game ends, if there is no special chart 2 reserved, the second time-saving game state ends. In addition, according to the fourth pachinko game machine, if the stop pattern of the small win is a special pattern, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state) and the small win game is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, if some of the stop patterns that are misses stop in a special pattern, the game may transition to the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state). In this case, the player cannot win prize balls due to a small win, but by controlling in this way, it is possible to perform a performance in which the time-saving is continued or started while appearing to have ended.

In this way, in the fourth pachinko game machine, if the special chart lottery is in a low probability state and the special chart fluctuation reaches 850 times, the machine will transition to a small win rush in which small win games are more likely to be played consecutively. Details of the small win rush will be described later, but the small win rush ends when there is no special chart 2 reserved when one time-saving special chart 2 fluctuation is consumed, and the stopping mode of the special chart 2 of the final fluctuation is a stopping mode that does not grant time-saving, in other words, it is not a special mode. When the small win rush ends, the machine transitions to the normal state.

When the normal drawing is won in the normal state, specifically, when the game ball enters the central ball entry port 3128 and passes through the normal drawing start port 3220 in the normal state, a normal drawing lottery is held, and when the normal drawing is won, the game moves to the second bonus for 20 small wins. In the second bonus, 10 balls can be expected to enter the large winning entry port 3131 for the big win in one small win game, so 3000 prize balls can be expected, and 300 prize balls are added because 10 balls enter the second starting port 3140. In this way, a maximum of 3300 prize balls can be expected in the second bonus. However, it is not always possible to win one ball by opening the large winning entry port 3131 for the big win once, or if the special drawing 1 variation is being executed when the normal drawing is won, the special drawing 2 variation cannot start until the special drawing 1 variation stops, so the number of small wins may decrease, so it is not always possible to win a maximum of 3300 prize balls. In the fourth pachinko game machine, you can expect to win 1,000 to 3,300 balls in the second bonus. When the second bonus ends, the game returns to normal mode.

[Small Hit RUSH]
Next, the small hit RUSH will be described in detail with reference to Figures 95 and 96.
In the fourth pachinko game machine, the player plays the game by hitting the left side in the normal state and aiming for a special chart 1 jackpot or a normal chart jackpot by making the game ball enter the central ball entrance 3128. Here, since the probability that the game ball that entered the central ball entrance 3128 will enter the first starting hole 3120A is 1/3, the specifications are such that it is difficult to accumulate reserves of special chart 1 variations in the normal state. For this reason, there are many cases where there are no reserves of special chart 1 variations when the special chart variations reach 850 times.

Figure 95 shows the case where the special chart change reaches 850 times without the special chart 1 change being reserved and the game moves to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving). In the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), a right hit is made to pass the game ball through the passing gate 3126 to start the normal chart change. When the normal chart change stops in a winning state, the normal electric device 3146 is activated. When the normal electric device 3146 is activated and captures the game ball (normal electric winning in Figure 95), the second non-electric device 3441 is activated and opens, and the second non-electric device 3441 is closed by the passage of two game balls. The two game balls that pass through the second non-electric device 3441 start winning in the second start port 3140 (special chart 2 winning in Figure 95), and the special chart 2 starts to change due to the previous start winning, and the special chart 2 change due to the later start winning is reserved. When the special chart 2 starts to change, the second time-saving game state ends and the probability of winning the special chart lottery transitions to a low probability state. When the special chart 2 stops changing, most wins are small wins, so the small win game is executed (small win operation in Figure 95, small win operation ends).

If the stop mode of the special chart 2 that has won the small win here is a special mode, the game will transition to the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state) after the small win game ends. However, since the reserved special chart 2 variation starts immediately, the second time-saving game state ends in a short time. For this reason, during the second time-saving game state from the end of the small win game to the start of the next special chart 2 variation, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 3126, and normal chart variation almost never starts. Therefore, it is extremely difficult for the reserved special chart 2 to increase during the second time-saving game state triggered by the previous special chart 2 start winning. Therefore, regardless of whether the previous variation in the case of a reserved special chart 2 variation is a variation that transitions to the time-saving state or not, the end of the RUSH is determined by whether the last special chart 2 variation is a variation that transitions to the time-saving state or not. In addition, regardless of whether the small win stop mode of the special chart 2 change triggered by the special chart 2 start winning after the reservation is a special mode or not, the small win game is executed (small win operation, small win operation end in FIG. 95). In addition, if the small win stop mode of the special chart 2 due to the later start winning is a special mode, it will transition to the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state) after the small win game ends.

In this case, the special chart 2 change does not start because there is no reserved special chart 2 after the small win game ends. Since it is necessary to win the normal chart lottery to start the special chart 2 change, the player hits the right side and passes the game ball through the passing gate 3126 during the second time-saving game state to start the normal chart change. The normal chart change at this time will start during the second time-saving game state (c time-saving state). When the normal chart change stops in a winning state, the normal electric role 3146 is activated, and when the normal electric role 3146 captures the game ball, the second non-electric role 3441 is activated and opens, and the second non-electric role 3441 is closed by the passage of two game balls. The two game balls that pass through the second non-electric role 3441 enter the second start hole 3140 for start winning. Thereafter, two small win games corresponding to the start winning of the two game balls into the second start hole 3140 are similarly executed. In this way, if the stop mode of the special chart 2 due to the subsequent start winning is a special mode, the game will transition to the second time-saving game mode after the small win game ends, and the state in which it is easy to win a small win will be repeated. In other words, the small win RUSH will continue.

Figure 96 shows the case where the small win rush ends, and the stopping pattern of special chart 2 due to the subsequent starting winning indicates a small win. However, if there is no special pattern, as shown in Figure 96 (a), the small win rush ends after the small win game ends and the state returns to normal.
In addition, if the stopping mode of the special chart 2 due to the subsequent starting winning does not indicate a big win or a small win, and is not a special mode, then after the special chart 2 stops, as shown in Figure 96 (b), the small win rush ends and the state returns to normal.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, the reserved number of special chart 2 variations is "1", but it may be more than that. In this case, the small win rush ends when the final variation of special chart 2 is a small win that does not grant time reduction and there is no reserved special chart 2, or when the final variation of special chart 2 is a miss that does not grant time reduction and there is no reserved special chart 2.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol 2 changes to the normal state, it is during the second bonus, and the stop pattern is determined so that the special symbol 2 does not stop in a special mode in the normal state in order to prevent a transition to the c time reduction during the second bonus. In contrast, in the second time reduction game state, the small win stop mode of the special symbol 2 is included in a special mode so that the small win RUSH continues with a predetermined probability. It is also possible to include cases where the loss stop mode of the special symbols 1 and 2 is a special mode, but it is desirable to make the probability of the special mode appearing higher in the second time reduction game state than in the normal state so that the probability of transitioning to the c time reduction during the second bonus is lower.

Now, in the fourth pachinko game machine, suppose that when the b time reduction starts, the special chart 1 reservation remains, the special chart 1 variation is executed in the b time reduction state, and during this special chart 1 variation, the player hits the right and two game balls enter the second start hole 3140 for the start prize. In this case, the special chart 2 variation is reserved "1", and the special chart 2 variation starts immediately after the special chart 1 stops, ending the second time reduction game state (b time reduction), so the special chart 2 variation acquired by the player in the second time reduction game state (b time reduction) is reserved once.

Therefore, if there are any reserved special charts 1 remaining when the b time reduction starts, it is possible to obtain two special chart 2 variations by consuming all remaining reserved special charts 1 and then switching to right play. However, if the remaining reserved special charts 1 include a jackpot, the number of times the special charts have changed (number of times it was activated n) is reset, so the b time reduction state does not transition after the jackpot game state ends, and as a result, the game does not transition to the small jackpot rush.

Therefore, if there are any reserved special charts 1 remaining at the time the b time reduction starts, it is possible to have the player choose a strategy for playing when the b time reduction starts. For example, if there are three reserved special charts 1 remaining at the time the b time reduction starts, and a relatively reliable reserved ball notice appears when the special chart 1 changes and there are only two reserved special charts 1, the player can choose between playing the special chart 1 as is and seeing the results, or hitting to the right and aiming for both a small hit rush and a big hit on the special chart 1.

The number of times the time reduction b is to be changed may be displayed to notify the player of the timing of the start of the time reduction b. This makes it easy for the player to play the game without having a special number 1 reserved at the start of the time reduction b.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned configuration, when the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is entered, the number of time-saving times is "1200 times" as a total of the special chart 1 variation and the special chart 2 variation and "1 time" as the special chart 2 variation, so that the number of time-saving times is effectively "1 time" for the special chart 2 variation, but it may be "1 time" as a total of the special chart 1 variation and the special chart 2 variation. As a result, if there is a special chart 1 reservation at the time when the operation number n is reached, the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) will end when the special chart 1 variation starts next, so the player needs to hit the right to start the normal chart variation and acquire the special chart 2 reservation. In other words, in order to transition to the small hit RUSH, the b time-saving is activated at the start of the special chart 1 variation when the operation number n is reached, and it is necessary to hit the right during the variation to acquire the special chart 2 reservation. In this way, it is possible to provide the player with a tense game. In addition, if there is no reserved special symbol 2 at the time when the special symbol variation reaches the number of times n that it is activated and stops, the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) may be ended. This can give the player an even greater sense of tension.

[5-6. Production screen]
97 to 100 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 3007 in the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 97 shows the presentation screen from the normal state when a jackpot is won and the game state transitions to the jackpot game state, and from the time when the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends. In the normal state, the game is played by hitting from the left, and as mentioned above, the probability of winning the normal lottery is low (1/319.6), and if the normal lottery is won in the normal state, the normal electric device 3146 is opened. The normal electric device 3146 is opened for a time that is long enough to capture one game ball, and is performed 10 times with long intervals between each.

In addition, in the normal state, the special chart 1 changes when a winning ball enters the first starting hole 3120A, so the display device 3007 displays the special chart 1 identification pattern 3601 for performance, the special chart 2 identification pattern 3602 for performance, the normal chart identification pattern 3603 for performance, special chart 1 reserved information 3611, special chart 2 reserved information 3612, normal chart reserved information 3613, and various other information and performance images. The special chart 1 identification pattern 3601 for performance is displayed large in the center of the display area of the display device 3007 so that it can be easily seen by the player. The normal chart identification pattern 3603 for performance is displayed below the special chart 1 identification pattern 3601 for performance so that it can be easily seen by the player. The special chart 1 reserved information 3611 and the special chart 2 reserved information 3612 consist of a larger reserved pattern corresponding to the currently changing special chart 1 variation or special chart 2 reserved information 3612, and a smaller reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved special chart 1 variation. The regular chart reserved information 3613 indicates the number of reserved regular chart variations in numbers.

In the normal state, when the player hits the ball from the left, the game ball enters the central ball entry port 3128 and passes through the first starting port 3120A and the regular starting port 3220, causing the first identification pattern 3601 for the performance and the regular identification pattern 3603 for the performance to change as shown in FIG. 97(a), and if the special pattern 1 lottery is a miss, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the first identification pattern 3601 for the performance is displayed as a miss, and the larger reserved pattern is erased. If the regular lottery is a miss, the regular identification pattern 3603 for the performance is displayed as a miss, as shown in FIG. 97(c).

As shown in FIG. 97(b), when the first identification pattern 3601 for the effect stops and is displayed in a losing state, the remaining smaller reserved patterns slide and become larger reserved patterns as shown in FIG. 97(c), and the first identification pattern 3601 for the effect starts to change based on the special pattern 1 reserved information 3611.

If the special chart 1 lottery is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 97(d), the first identification symbol 3601 for the effect is displayed in a jackpot mode, and the larger reserved symbols are erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 97(e), an image is displayed notifying the player of the transition to the jackpot game state (first bonus), and as shown in FIG. 97(f), an image encouraging the player to hit to the right and an image notifying the number of rounds are displayed. In the jackpot game state, the game is played by hitting to the right. Furthermore, the normal chart changes even in the jackpot game state. However, even if a normal chart is won in the jackpot game state, the normal chart win game is not executed. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the special chart 1 and special chart 2 changes are not executed.

Figure 97 (g) is an example of the display on the display device 3007 when the jackpot game state ends. For example, by displaying "160 times of special probability mode," it is suggested to the player that after the jackpot game state ends, the probability of winning the special lottery will be in a high probability state, and further, the game will move to the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) with 160 time-saving times. In the first time-saving game state, the game is played by hitting to the right, and the probability of winning the normal lottery is in a high probability state.

Figure 97 (h) shows an example of the display of the display device 3007 in the probability variable mode, in which an image instructing right-hand hit is displayed on the display device 3007 together with the first identification pattern 3601 for effect and special pattern 1 reserved information 3611. When the first identification pattern 3601 for effect is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode in the probability variable mode, the display device 3007 displays the image shown in Figure 97 (e) and then performs a performance display in the jackpot game state. When 160 time-saving times have been consumed in the probability variable mode, the display device 3007 returns to the image shown in Figure 97 (a) and displays an image instructing left-hand hit. The image instructing left-hand hit is displayed during one change from the start to the end of the change of the first identification pattern 3601 for effect. In the fourth embodiment, the first time-saving game state ends when the first identification pattern 3601 for the effect of the 160th time-saving effect starts to change. For example, a display encouraging the player to hit left, such as "Please hit left," may be displayed between the time when the first identification pattern 3601 for the effect of the 160th time-saving effect starts to change and the time when it ends.

Figure 98 shows the presentation screen from the normal state to the normal winning game state after winning the normal lottery, and from the normal winning game state to the normal state. In the normal state, the player hits the ball from the left, and the game ball enters the central ball entrance 3128 and passes through the first starting hole 3120A and the normal starting hole 3220. As shown in Figure 98(a), the first identification pattern 3601 for presentation and the normal identification pattern 3603 for presentation change, and as shown in Figure 98(b), when the same type of normal identification pattern 3603 for presentation is stopped in a line of three, the player is notified that he has won the normal lottery, and as shown in Figure 98(c), the display device 3007 displays "special bonus" and the player is notified that the game will transition to the normal winning game state (second bonus). At this time, an image instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Then, when the player hits the right hand, the game ball is captured by the normal electric device 3146, the second non-electric device 3441 opens, and two game balls enter the second starting hole 3140. Accordingly, two special pattern 2 reserved information 3612 are displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 98(c), and the second identification pattern 3602 for the performance starts to change. Then, as shown in FIG. 98(d), when the second identification pattern 3602 for the performance stops in a small winning mode, an image suggesting the number of small winnings in the normal winning game state, called the first bonus, is displayed. After that, as the number of small winnings increases, the number of small winnings displayed on the display device 3007 is updated, and when the last second identification pattern 3602 stops changing in the normal winning game state, an image suggesting the end of the normal winning game state (second bonus), called the last, is displayed, as shown in FIG. 98(e). Then, when the normal winning game state (second bonus) ends, the display returns to the normal state as shown in FIG. 98(f). At this time, an image instructing you to hit left is displayed.

In the fourth pachinko game machine, the maximum number of small wins in the normal winning game state (second bonus) is 20, but the number of small wins is not necessarily 20. For example, the special drawing 2 lottery includes a miss, and in the case of a miss, the small win game is not executed, so the number of small wins will be reduced by the number of misses. In addition, in the normal winning game state (second bonus), all special drawing 2 lotteries may be small wins, and the number of small wins can be won 20 times. Also, if the special drawing 1 variation is being executed at the time of the normal winning, even if you hit the right and get the special drawing 2 reserved, the special drawing 2 variation will not start until the special drawing 1 variation stops. Therefore, even if the normal winning game is being executed, the small win game will not be executed until the special drawing 1 variation stops, so the number of small wins will be reduced accordingly. Also, if the special chart 1 variation is being executed at the time of the normal winning, if this special chart 1 variation stops in the big winning mode, the screen of the display device 3007 will switch from the screen shown in FIG. 98(c) to the screen shown in FIG. 97(e), and the performance display in the big winning game state will be executed. Furthermore, after the big winning game state ends, the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) will be executed. Here, since the special chart 2 variation is reserved at the start of the first time-saving game state, there is a high possibility that a small winning will be obtained by the special chart 2 variation. However, even if the small winning mode at this time is a special mode (for example, an odd number arrangement), the time-saving c will not be activated and the time-saving a state will continue.

Figure 99 shows the display screen before and after the transition to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving). Figure 99(a) shows the display screen when the special chart changes for the 848th time, and Figure 99(b) shows the display screen when the special chart changes for the 849th time. A countdown display is performed from the point when the specified number of times (850 times) before the transition to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is reached (for example, 10 times before), thereby informing the player that the transition to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is near. Then, when the specified number of times (850 times) is reached, as shown in Figure 99(c), at the same time as the start of the special chart change, as shown in Figure 99(d), "Entering small hit RUSH" is displayed on the display device 3007, and an image of a right hit instruction is also displayed. In addition, since it is in a normal state before reaching the specified number of times (850 times), and it is difficult to start winning in the second start port 3140, as shown in FIG. 99(d), "Small Win RUSH Entry" is displayed at the same time as the start of the special chart 1 variation, as shown in FIG. 99(e), "Small Win RUSH Start" is displayed at the time when the special chart 1 variation stops, as shown in FIG. 99(f), "RUSH 1st Time" is displayed, and two special chart 2 reserved information 3612 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 99(g), the judgment result based on the first special chart 2 reserved information 3612 is notified to the player by the stopping mode of the second identification pattern 3602 for performance, and then, as shown in FIG. 99(h), the judgment result based on the second special chart 2 reserved information 3612 is notified to the player by the stopping mode of the second identification pattern 3602 for performance. Here, if the second identification pattern 3602 stops in an odd-numbered sequence, a small win is won, and after the small win game ends, the game moves to a second time-saving game state (c time-saving), in which "one" time-saving count is granted. In this way, the odd-numbered second identification pattern 3602 stop is an example of a special mode. If the second identification pattern 3602 stops in an even-numbered sequence, a small win is won, and the game state does not change after the small win game ends. Since the stop mode of the second identification pattern 3602 for the performance shown in FIG. 99(h) is a special mode, if the special pattern 2 reservation can be acquired by "one" time-saving, the small win RUSH can continue. Therefore, "continue" and an image suggesting that the small win RUSH can continue are also displayed.

If the special chart 2 reservation is acquired during the display screen shown in FIG. 99(h), as shown in FIG. 100(a), "RUSH 2nd time" is displayed, and two of the reserved information 3612 of FIG. 2 are displayed. After that, the stop mode of the special chart 2 variation based on the second reserved information 3612 of the special chart 2 becomes a special mode, and the small hit RUSH continues. FIG. 100(b) shows the case where the small hit RUSH continues 10 times. As shown in FIG. 99(d) to FIG. 99(h), FIG. 100(a) and FIG. 100(b), the image display of the right hit instruction continues during the small hit RUSH. Here, after the special chart 2 starts to vary in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) ends and the state returns to the normal state when the special chart 2 is stopped and displayed, but the image display of the right hit instruction continues as shown in FIG. 99(g).

If the stopping mode of the special pattern 2 variation based on the second special pattern 2 reserved information 3612 is not a special mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 100(c), in the case of a small win where the stopping mode of the special pattern 2 variation is not a special mode, "End" is displayed at the same time as the special pattern 2 variation stops, and after the small win game ends, as shown in FIG. 100(d), the display screen returns to the normal state. At this time, an image instructing left hit is displayed. The image instructing left hit is displayed during one change from the start to the end of the second identification pattern 3602 change.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 100(e), there is another case where the stop mode of the special chart 2 change based on the second special chart 2 reserved information 3612 is not a special mode, and the stop mode of the special chart 2 change is not a special mode. In this case, "End" is displayed at the same time as the special chart 2 change stops, and the display screen returns to the normal state as shown in FIG. 100(d). In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the stop mode of the special chart 2 change based on the second special chart 2 reserved information 3612 is not a special mode, a change pattern with a long change time of the special chart 2 is selected, and a display such as "Please hit left" to encourage left hit may be displayed between the start and end of the change of the second identification pattern 3602 for the performance.

[5-7. Effects of the fourth pachinko game machine]
According to the fourth pachinko gaming machine configured as described above, the following effects are achieved.
According to the fourth pachinko game machine, the machine is equipped with the b time reduction and the c time reduction, and the second non-electric device 3441 is provided in the second starting hole 3140, which opens when the normal electric device 3146 captures a game ball in the b time reduction and the c time reduction state, and closes when two game balls enter the open state, and is equipped with a function of granting one time of time reduction after a small win and a small win game when the stop mode of the special chart 2 variation is a special mode. As a result, one time of time reduction is granted when the specified number of variations are consumed and the game enters the b time reduction, and the player may be able to win two special chart 2 variations with this one time of time reduction. There is a high possibility that two small win games can be won with these two special chart 2 variations, and since one time of time reduction is granted when the second small win mode is a special mode, there is a high possibility that two small win games can be won again. In this way, by varying the special pattern up to a specified number of times, it becomes possible to obtain a small win rush, and further, if the second small win pattern is a special pattern, the small win rush continues, making it possible to provide the player with a game ball with a new interest.

In addition, during the small win rush, when the normal electric device 3146 captures the game ball, the release of the game ball can be stopped, and the game can be interrupted with the second non-electric device 3411 left in the open state. Then, by hitting the right side again, the game ball can be captured by the second non-electric device 3411, starting the special chart 2 variation, and if the second special chart 2 variation stops in a special mode, the small win rush can be continued. In this way, by leaving the second non-electric device 3411 in the open state, it is possible to interrupt the game even during the small win rush, and take a toilet break.

In addition, during the small win RUSH, the number of prize balls that can be acquired by one small win game due to the special chart 2 variation is 150, and by continuing one small win RUSH, the player can acquire 300 prize balls. Therefore, depending on the number of times the small win RUSH continues, it may be possible to acquire more prize balls than one first bonus or second bonus. In this way, in the fourth pachinko game machine, it is possible to increase the interest in the small win RUSH that is executed when the specified number of variations are consumed. In addition, in the first time-saving game state, a large number of prize balls can be acquired by winning the special chart 1 lottery and transitioning to the big win game state, and in the second time-saving game state, most of the time is spent winning a small win by the special chart 2 lottery, and by transitioning to the small win game state, a small number of prize balls can be acquired. In this way, the benefits given to the player in the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state are different, so it is possible to provide time-saving game states with different playability.

In addition, according to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the player wins the regular drawing lottery in the normal state, the game moves to the second bonus, which is expected to give more winning balls than the first bonus (the jackpot game state resulting from the special drawing 1 jackpot). This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can generate great interest in the regular drawing lottery.

Although the fourth pachinko game machine according to the present invention has been described above, the fourth pachinko game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the interval time for each opening of the normal electric role 3146 is configured to include the play time for small wins, but it is not limited to this, and it may be set to include the play time for big wins in addition to small wins. Specifically, as a big win game, the opening and closing operation of the small win game is performed for two or more rounds, and a big win that transitions to a normal state without low probability time reduction after the big win game is completed may be included, so that the player feels that the number of openings has increased. This makes it possible to continuously execute the performance of multiple big wins as one big win based on one normal winning, and it is expected that many balls will be awarded at once.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, after the ball enters the central ball entrance 3128, a crown plate 3210 including a special figure 1 and a normal figure start port is provided, and the structure is such that the special figure 1 and the normal figure are drawn simultaneously in the normal state, but this is not limited to this, and a crown including a special figure 2, a normal electric device, a big prize entrance, a general prize entrance, an out entrance, etc., or a combination of these may be provided.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, two balls can enter the second non-electric device 3411 for each winning (one opening) of the normal electric device 3146, and the second non-electric device 3411 is closed when two balls enter it, but this is not limited to this, and a non-electric device that allows one ball to enter the normal electric device 3146 for each winning (one opening), closes the device when one ball enters, and starts the first start hole 3121B or the second start hole 3140, or a combination of these may be provided.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, if a jackpot occurs while opening one set of 10 normal electric parts 3146, a configuration may be provided in which the machine transitions to a jackpot game state regardless of the operating state of the normal electric parts 3146 and continues the opening operation. In this case, after the jackpot transition, the normal electric parts 3146 and the second non-electric parts 3411 are opened in the same manner as before the jackpot transition, but unlike before the jackpot transition, the second starting hole 3140 may not change or perform a small win operation due to the ball entering the second non-electric part 3411. In addition, the special chart reservation based on the ball entering the normal electric part 3146 is not consumed during the jackpot, but is consumed after the jackpot ends. In addition, in a pachinko game machine equipped with a non-electric part that supports winning, the non-electric part may be replaced with an electric part.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the time-saving feature ends at the same time as the special chart fluctuation starts, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving feature may end when the fluctuation ends, at a specific timing during the fluctuation, or a combination of these.

In addition, the fourth pachinko game machine is configured to switch between a time-saving state and a non-time-saving state in the small hit rush state, and the time-saving state that changes the special chart 2 always issues a right-hit notification, but it may also be configured to switch between a right-hit notification and a left-hit notification depending on the state, or to combine these.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the majority of the results of the special chart 2 lottery are small wins, and there is a low probability of a miss. In the case of a small win or miss that is not a special mode, the small win rush ends, but after the big win game ends, including the big win that is the first bonus, the small win rush may end by transitioning to a sure-win mode and a time-saving mode.

In addition, in the fourth pachinko game machine, the small win stop mode caused by the special chart 2 change includes a special mode that transitions to the c time reduction, but the loss stop mode caused by the special chart 2 change may also include a special mode that transitions to the c time reduction.

[6. The fifth pachinko game machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. As described above, the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type one pachinko gaming machine called digital pachinko, and like the first pachinko gaming machine, it is a pachinko gaming machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

In the following explanation of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible explanation of the features that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine in terms of function, shape, location, etc., such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 4184 (see Figure 46) to outside the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 4186 (see Figure 46) and the island computer (not shown) installed on each island).

In describing the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, the configuration will be described with reference to new drawings used in describing the fifth pachinko gaming machine, using different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has functions and the like in common with the first pachinko gaming machine.

In describing the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in describing the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings newly adopted in describing the fourth pachinko gaming machine, using different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has the same functions, etc. as the first pachinko gaming machine.

[6-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 4010 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 101. This game board unit 4010 is also disposed behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) and in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2), similar to the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 45 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 4010 provided in the fifth pachinko game machine. A game area 4105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 4010, in which the released game ball can roll and flow down.

Note that the various components (e.g., first starting hole 4120A, etc.) arranged in the play area 4105 of the second pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine, but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 101, the game board unit 4010 mainly includes a game panel 4100 in which a game area 4105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 4110, a center role 4115 located approximately in the center of the game area 4105, first starting holes 4120A, 4120B, a general winning hole 4122, a passing gate unit 4125, a special electric role unit 4130, a second starting hole 4140, a normal electric role unit 4145, an LED unit 4160, an outlet 4178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 4160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description of it will be omitted for this fifth pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 4100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 4007. In addition, a guide rail 4110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 4100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted thereon. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 4110 toward the gaming area 4105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 4105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 4100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 4100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 4100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 4100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (e.g., wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(Guide rail)
The guide rail 4110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (both of which have no reference number) similar to the first pachinko game machine. The play area 4105 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 4110. The outer rail and the inner rail have the function of guiding the game balls launched from the launching device 4006 (see FIG. 102 described later) to the upper part of the play area 4105.

(Center role)
The center device 4115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 4100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 4116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 4105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 4116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 4006 toward the game area 4105 flows down the left area 4106 or the right area 4107. A game ball flowing down the left area 4106 or the right area 4107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 4100. If the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 4106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figure 1) is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 4107.

The center device 4115 also has a warp entrance 4117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 4106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 4117 are configured to be guided to a stage 4118 formed in the center device 4115. The stage 4118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 4007 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 4118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 4119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 4118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 4119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 4120A. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 4119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 4120A than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 4117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 4117 but do not enter the chance entrance 4119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 4120A is located below the display area of the display device 4007, and is located so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win). When a game ball enters the first starting hole 4120A, it is detected by the first starting hole switch 4121A (see FIG. 102 described below). In addition, the first starting hole 4120B is located in the right area 4107 of the display device 4007, and a game ball hit from the right can win the first starting hole 4120B. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 4120B, it is detected by the first starting hole switch 4121B (see FIG. 102 described below).

When the first start port switches 4121A, 4121B (see FIG. 102 described below) detect the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start port 4120A, 4120B, the start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, up to four) is reserved. When the start conditions are met, the reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start port 4120A, 4120B, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 4120A, 4120B is not limited to this.

(General prize entry)
The general winning openings 4122 are arranged in a plurality of locations on the lower left side of the display area of the display device 4007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 4122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 4123 (see FIG. 102 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 4123 (see FIG. 102 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 4122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 4122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 4122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 4122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(Passing gate unit)
The passing gate unit 4125 is a unit body that integrates a passing gate 4126 that is arranged in the right area 4107 and is configured so that the game ball hit from the right side can pass through, and a passing gate switch 4127 (see FIG. 102 described later) that detects the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 4126, and is arranged in the right area 4107 and is configured so that the game ball hit from the right side can pass through. When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 4126 is detected, the starting information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted starting information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). The reserved various data are used for the winning judgment process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 4127 detects the passing of the game ball to the passing gate unit 4125, the prize ball is not paid out. The passing gate unit 4125 may be arranged in the left area 4106 instead of or in addition to the right area 4107.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 4130 is a unit body that integrates a large winning opening 4131, a count switch 4132 (see FIG. 102 described later) that detects the winning (passage) of a game ball into the large winning opening 4131, and a special electric accessory 4133. The special electric accessory unit 4130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 4125 in the right side area 4107.

The large prize opening 4131 is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 4131 described above, a large prize opening that allows game balls hit from the left to win may be arranged, or a large prize opening that allows game balls to win may be arranged above the center device 4115.

The large prize opening 4131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) to enter (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the count switch 4132 (see FIG. 102 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 4131, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 4131 is not limited to 15.

The special electric device 4133 includes a special electric shutter 4134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 4135 (see FIG. 102 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 4134. The special electric device 4133, i.e., the special electric shutter 4134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 4131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 4131. In addition, in the big win game state, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the large prize opening 4131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time over multiple rounds.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 4140 is disposed in the left area 4106 (more specifically, below the first starting hole 4120A). However, the second starting hole 4140 is configured so that the game ball is guided to the vicinity of the second starting hole 4140 by the game nail so that both the game ball hit from the left and the game ball hit from the right can win. However, it is not essential to configure the second starting hole 4140 in this way, and it may be provided in the right area 4107 so that, for example, the game ball hit from the right can win. The second starting hole 4140 may also be configured so that the game ball hit from the left can win.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 4140, it is detected by the second start hole switch 4141 (see FIG. 102 described later). When the second start hole switch 4141 (see FIG. 102 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 4140, start information for the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). When the start condition is met, the reserved start information is used for the hit determination process for the second special pattern. When a game ball enters the second start hole 4140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second start hole 4140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 4140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 4145 is disposed in the right area 4107 (more specifically, directly below the passing gate 4126 and above the special electric accessory 4133), and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through), a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into this winning hole, and the normal electric accessory 4146. In the fifth pachinko game machine, the winning hole is the second start hole 4140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 4141.

The normal electric device 4146 includes a tongue-shaped normal power movable member 4147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 4148 (see FIG. 102 described later) that operates the normal power movable member 4147. The normal electric device 4146, i.e., the normal power movable member 4147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass) through the second start hole 4140 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter through the second start hole 4140 or is difficult to enter. The open state is a state in which the normal power movable member 4147 protrudes, and the game ball on the normal power movable member 4147 moves to the second start hole 4140. The closed state is a state in which the normal power movable member 4147 is retracted, and the game ball passes in front of the normal power movable member 4147. In addition, instead of the movable member for normal power supply 4147, also known as a power tube, a shutter that can rotate in the forward and backward directions, for example, may be used.

(Outlet)
The outlet 4178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 4105 but have not won any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 4120, the second starting port 4140, the big winning port 4131, and the general winning port 4122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 4178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 4105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 4178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 4122, etc., so that game balls flowing down the game area 4105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is used to decorate the game board unit 4010, as in the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 4100. This back unit is arranged around the display area of the display device 4007, and is equipped with a group of performance-use accessories 4058, such as movable accessories, controlled by the sub-control circuit 4300. At least one of the performance-use accessory group 4058 or a performance-use accessory component constituting the accessory functions as a performance-use accessory that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[6-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 102. Fig. 102 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine. Note that the control circuit of the fifth pachinko game machine has some parts in common with the control circuit of the first pachinko game machine, but will be described again in detail.

As shown in FIG. 102, the fifth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 4200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 4300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 4400, and a power supply circuit 4450.

[6-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 4200 includes a main CPU 4201, a main ROM 4202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 4203 (read-and-write memory), an initial reset circuit 4204, a backup capacitor 4207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

The main CPU 4201 is connected to the main ROM 4202, the main RAM 4203, the initial reset circuit 4204, etc. The main CPU 4201 has built-in functions such as a WDT that monitors operation and a function to prevent fraud.

The main ROM 4202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 4201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 4201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 4202.

The main RAM 4203 has a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 4203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 4201. Note that, although in this embodiment, RAM is used as the temporary storage area for the main CPU 4201, this is not limited to this, and any readable and writable storage medium will do.

The initial reset circuit 4204 monitors the main CPU 4201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 4207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 4203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 4200 also includes an I/O port 4205 that is communicatively connected to various devices, and a command output port 4206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 4300 so that various commands can be output.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 4200. For example, the normal symbol display unit 4161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 4162, the first special symbol display unit 4163, the second special symbol display unit 4164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 4165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 4166, the normal power solenoid 4148, and the special power solenoid 4135 are connected to the main control circuit 4200. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 4170 and the error notification monitor 4172 are also connected to the main control circuit 4200. The main control circuit 4200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 4205.

The performance display monitor 4170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 4201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the proportion of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 4172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, for example, if the pachinko game machine has a setting function, the error notification monitor 4172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc. Note that the setting change code may be a pattern that is not normally displayed on the special pattern display device (for example, a setting change pattern indicating that a setting change is in progress).

The main control circuit 4200 is also connected to the first start port switches 4121A and 4121B, the second start port switch 4141, the pass gate switch 4127, the count switch 4132, and the general winning port switch 4123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to the main control circuit 4200 via the I/O port 4205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 4200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 4184 used to transmit data to a hall computer 4186 that manages the pachinko machines in the entire hall, a setting key 4174 operated to change or check the setting value if the pachinko machine has a setting function, and a backup clear switch 4176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 4203 according to the operation of the manager of the game center. Note that if the pachinko machine has a setting function, the backup clear switch 4176 may be used as a switch to change the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of special chart 1 changes and the combined value of the number of special chart 1 changes and the number of special chart 2 changes are output to the outside, but the number of special chart 2 changes is not output to the outside.

The setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the manager of the game arcade. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176, and a case in which the manager of the game arcade can touch the setting key 4174 and/or the backup clear switch 4176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the manager of the game arcade to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 4174 and the backup clear switch 4176 are connected to the main control circuit 4200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 4400 or the power supply circuit 4450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the person in charge of the amusement facility from easily touching the setting key 4174 or the backup clear switch 4176.

[6-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 4300 includes a sub-CPU 4301, a program ROM 4302, a work RAM 4303, a display control circuit 4304, a sound control circuit 4305, an LED control circuit 4306, a role control circuit 4307, and a command input port 4308. The sub-control circuit 4300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 4200. Although not shown in FIG. 102, the sub-control circuit 4300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 4302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the fifth pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 4301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 4301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 4302. In particular, the sub-CPU 4301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 4200.

The work RAM 4303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 4301.

The display control circuit 4304 is a circuit for controlling the display of the display device 4007. The display control circuit 4304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM in which data for generating various types of image data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, a D/A converter for converting image data into an image signal, and the like.

The display control circuit 4304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 4007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 4301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 4007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 4304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 4007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 4007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 4007. In this way, the display control circuit 4304 can control the display device 4007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 4305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 4032. The audio control circuit 4305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, etc.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 4032. In response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub-CPU 4301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 4032.

The LED control circuit 4306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 4046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 4306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 4307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 4058). The reel control circuit 4307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

The reel control circuit 4307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 4301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 4301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 4308 is connected to the command output port 4206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 4200.

The payout/launch control circuit 4400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 4082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 4006 for launching game balls, a card unit 4180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 4400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 4200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 4082, and controls the payout device 4082 to pay out game balls.

A ball lending operation panel 4182 is connected to the card unit 4180. The ball lending operation panel 4182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (both not shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 4180. The payout/launch control circuit 4400 controls the payout device 4082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 4180. The operation panel 4182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 4180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 4400 supplies power to the launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 4450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 4200, the sub control circuit 4300, the payout/launch control circuit 4400, etc.

The power supply circuit 4450 is connected to a power switch 4095 and other components. The power switch 4095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 4200, the sub-control circuit 4300, the payout/launch control circuit 4400, etc.).

[6-3. Basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

[Big hit, small hit probability]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, there are almost no "misses" in both the special pattern 1 lottery and the special pattern 2 lottery, and the specifications make it easy to win a small or big win. For example, the probability of a big win being determined in the first and second special pattern lottery is about 1/319 in a low probability state and about 1/99 in a high probability state. The probability of a small win being determined in the first and second special pattern lottery is about 317/319 in a low probability state and about 97/99 in a high probability state. Therefore, the probability of a miss being determined in the first and second special pattern lottery is about 1/319 in a low probability state and about 1/99 in a high probability state.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, the number of prize balls awarded by starting winning into the first starting hole 4120A, 4120B and the second starting hole 4140 is 4, the number of prize balls awarded by winning into the large winning hole 4131 is 15, the number of prize balls awarded by winning into the general winning hole 4122 is 10, the number of rounds in the big win game state is 10 rounds, and after the big win game ends, there is a 100% probability of transitioning to a high probability time-saving game state. The number of times for the special mode and the time-saving mode are both 160 times, and the normal mode is restored when 160 time-saving modes have been consumed.

In the big win game state, one round ends when 10 game balls enter the big prize opening 4131 or when the big prize opening 4131 remains open for approximately 30 seconds. In the small win game state, the big prize opening 4131 opens for a short time, but it is difficult to win a prize. If you play with a left hit and win a small hit, even if you switch to a right hit, the big prize opening 4131 will close before the game ball reaches it.

[Time-saving count]
In the fifth pachinko game machine, at least the b time reduction is installed among the above-mentioned a time reduction, b time reduction, and c time reduction. When the number of times of special chart fluctuations in the case where the probability of winning the lottery is low reaches the number of times of operation n (for example, 750 times), the b time reduction is activated.

[Special symbol variation pattern]
The variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on a variation pattern table of the special symbols. The variation pattern table of the special symbols includes a variation pattern table of the special symbols for a low start that is referred to in a normal game state, and a variation pattern table of the special symbols for a high start that is referred to in a time-saving game state. The variation pattern table of the special symbols for a low start and the variation pattern table of the special symbols for a high start include tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low starts, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation of, for example, 580 to 600 seconds, regardless of the result of the special symbol 2 lottery, which is set to be significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 1 (for example, a maximum of 95 seconds). In the case of a small hit or miss in the special symbol 1 lottery, in most cases (for example, 90%) a fluctuation pattern of about 1 second is selected.

In the special pattern change table for high starts, the special pattern change time when the results of the special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 lottery are a small hit or a miss is set to be longer than the special pattern change time when it is a big hit. For example, the special pattern change time when it is a small hit or a miss is set to 1 second, and when it is a big hit is set to 0.5 seconds.

[6-4. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 4201 of the main control circuit 4200 in the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 4201 have many common processes with the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 in the first pachinko gaming machine described with reference to Figures 13 to 39, but differ in the following points.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, in the game state management process of the first pachinko gaming machine shown in S111 of FIG. 21, a process is added to turn on the b time-saving flag, which indicates that the b time-saving function is operating, when the number of times the special chart changes in the low probability state reaches the number of times n the special chart changes.

The fifth pachinko game machine also executes the processes in S146 to S148 shown in FIG. 21. In these processes, in the first pachinko game machine, in the event of a big win, the special electric device 1133 is driven to open the big win large prize opening 1131, and in the event of a small win, the small win solenoid 1154 is driven to open the small win large prize opening 1151, but in the fifth pachinko game machine, the main CPU 4201 controls the special electric device 4133 to open the big win large prize opening 4131 in both the event of a big win and a small win.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, other processing executed by the main CPU 4201 is the same as in the first pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, a description of the other processing executed by the main CPU 4201 will be omitted.

[6-5. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 4301 of the sub-control circuit 4300 will be described. The various processes executed by the sub-CPU 4301 execute various processes executed by the sub-CPU 4301 related to the first pachinko gaming machine described with reference to Fig. 40. In particular, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a command analysis process shown in Fig. 103 is executed.

(Command analysis process)
The subroutine (command analysis process) executed in S323 of FIG. 40 will be described with reference to FIGS.

In S4110, a process is performed to determine whether or not a command has been received. In this process, the sub-CPU 4301 determines whether or not the received command has been stored in a specified buffer, and if it determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to S4120, and if the sub-CPU 4301 does not determine that a command has been received, this subroutine is terminated.

In S4120, a process is performed to determine whether the received command is a special symbol game end command. In this process, if the sub-CPU 4301 determines that the command is a special symbol game end command, it transfers the process to S4130, and if it does not determine that the command is a special symbol game end command, it transfers the process to S4140.

In S4130, the sub-CPU 4301 performs processing upon receiving a special pattern game end command shown in FIG.
In S4140, the sub CPU 4301 performs processing according to the received command. When this processing is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the process when a special symbol game end command is received, the sub-CPU 4301 first performs a process to determine whether or not the game is in a special probability state (S4210). If it is determined that the game is in a special probability state, the process proceeds to S4260. If it is not determined that the game is in a special probability state, the process proceeds to S4220.

In S4220, a process is performed to update the low probability special chart change count counter. In this process, the sub-CPU 4301 performs a process to add "1" to the value in a specified area of the work RAM 4303 that functions as the low probability special chart change count counter. In other words, the value of the low probability special chart change count counter is updated when special chart 1 change and special chart 2 change stop. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S4230.

In S4230, the sub-CPU 4301 performs processing to determine whether or not play on special chart 1 has ended. If it determines that play on special chart 1 has ended, it transfers processing to S4240. If it does not determine that play on special chart 1 has ended, it transfers processing to S4250.

In S4240, a process is performed to update the low probability special chart 1 change count counter. In this process, the sub-CPU 4301 performs a process to add "1" to the value in a specified area of the work RAM 4303 that functions as the low probability special chart 1 change count counter. In other words, the value of the low probability special chart change count counter is updated when special chart 1 change stops, and is not updated when special chart 2 change stops. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S4250.

In S4250, a process is performed to set the variation count display effect and the ceiling suggestion effect. In this process, the sub-CPU 4301 performs a process to set the value of the low probability special chart 1 variation count counter to be displayed on the display device 4007. The sub-CPU 4301 also performs a process to set a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests how far it is until the b time reduction is entered, depending on the difference between the number of operations n (for example, 750 times) for entering the b time reduction and the value of the low probability special chart variation count counter. For example, as a ceiling suggestion effect, a star is displayed on the display device 4007, and the display color is changed to white if the difference is 750 to 551, blue if it is 550 to 351, yellow if it is 350 to 151, purple if it is 150 to 51, red if it is 50 to 11, and rainbow if it is 10 to 1. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S4260.

In S4260, the sub-CPU 4301 performs other processing that is executed when a special symbol game end command is received. For example, in the case of a jackpot, the sub-CPU 4301 performs processing to reset the low probability special symbol change count counter and the low probability special symbol 1 change count counter. When this processing is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[6-6. Production screen]
105 and 106 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

105(a) shows an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the normal state, and various presentation images including a special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation, special chart 1 reserved information 4611, number of changes information 4621 that notifies the number of changes of special chart 1 in a low probability state (non-probability change state), and suggestion information 4622 that suggests the number of changes remaining until b time reduction is reached are displayed on the display device 4007. In the normal state, since it is possible to win the first start port 4120A and the second start port 4140, a special chart 1 change or a special chart 2 change is performed in the first special pattern display unit 4163 or the second special pattern display unit 4164. On the other hand, the display device 4007 displays a special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation corresponding to the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display unit 4163, but does not display the special pattern for presentation and reserved information corresponding to the second special pattern displayed by the second special pattern display unit 4164.

The special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for the effect is displayed large in the center of the display area of the display device 4007 so that it can be easily seen by the player. The special chart 1 reserved information 4611 consists of a larger reserved pattern corresponding to the currently changing special chart 1 variation and a smaller reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved special chart 1 variation.

The change count information 4621 and the suggestion information 4622 are images of the change count display effect and the ceiling suggestion effect, which are set by the process shown in S4250 of FIG. 104. In FIG. 105(a), the special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for the effect is changing, and by visually checking the change count information 4621, it can be seen that the special chart 1 change has occurred 600 times. In addition, since the color of the star mark, which is the suggestion information 4622, is purple, it can be seen that the number of changes remaining until the b time reduction is reached is 150 to 51.

In this way, in the normal state, the display device 4007 displays the effects related to Special Chart 1, and information related to the Special Chart 2 lottery is hidden.

Incidentally, under normal circumstances, the time that special chart 2 changes is significantly longer than the time that special chart 1 changes, so there is a high possibility that special chart 2 is changing when special chart 1 stops changing. Also, since the majority of the lottery results for special chart 1 and special chart 2 are small wins, when special chart 1 stops changing and becomes a small win, the change of special chart 2 is forcibly stopped in a miss mode even if it was a big win. Conversely, if special chart 1 is changing when special chart 2 changes stop in a small win mode, the change of special chart 1 is forcibly stopped in a miss mode. For this reason, if there are both special chart 1 and special chart 2 reserved, they will start changing at the same time after special chart 1 and special chart 2 stop, and in most cases special chart 1 will stop changing first.

In other words, when the variation of special chart 1 stops, the variation of special chart 2 is forcibly stopped in a miss mode, so that in the process of updating the low probability special chart variation count counter shown in S4220 of FIG. 104, the value of the low probability special chart variation count counter increases by "2", and in the process of updating the low probability special chart 1 variation count counter shown in S4240, the value of the low probability special chart 1 variation count counter increases by "1". The variation count information 4621 notified to the player is the value of the low probability special chart 1 variation count counter, and therefore is lower than the number of special chart variations (the sum of the number of special chart 1 variation count and the number of special chart 2 variation count) in the actual low probability state (non-probability state).

In the state shown in FIG. 105(a), suppose that the special chart 2 variation has been performed 99 times. In this case, when the special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for the performance during the variation stops with a small hit or miss, as shown in FIG. 105(b), the variation count information 4621 is updated to "601" and the suggestion information 4622 switches to red. As the player further increases the number of times the special chart varies, as shown in FIG. 105(c), the color of the star mark, which is the suggestion information 4622, changes to rainbow color, and it is notified that there are only a few variations remaining until the b time reduction is reached. Then, as the player increases the number of times the special chart varies several times, as shown in FIG. 105(d), a display of "Ceiling mode started" is displayed, which indicates that the b time reduction has been activated, and a display of "Right hit" is displayed to encourage the player to hit the right. In addition, according to the fifth pachinko game machine, the game state changes when the special pattern change starts, so when the 750th special pattern change ends and the next special pattern change starts, the "Ceiling mode start" and "Right hit" messages are displayed.

Figure 105 (e) shows an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the b time-saving state (ceiling mode), and various presentation images including the special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation, the special chart 2 identification pattern 4602 for presentation, the special chart 1 reserved information 4611, and the special chart 2 reserved information 4612 are displayed on the display device 4007. In the b time-saving state (ceiling mode), it is possible to win the first start port 4120A and the second start port 4140, and the display device 4007 displays the special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation corresponding to the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display unit 4163 and the special chart 2 identification pattern 4602 for presentation corresponding to the second special pattern displayed by the second special pattern display unit 4164. In addition, in the b time-saving state (ceiling mode), the fluctuation number information 4621 and the suggestion information 4622 displayed in the normal state are not displayed.

Incidentally, in the b time-saving state (ceiling mode), the special chart change time (e.g., 1 second) when the results of the special chart 1 and special chart 2 lottery are a small win or a miss is set longer than the special chart change time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) when a big win occurs. For this reason, when the special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for performance and the special chart 2 identification pattern 4602 for performance start to change at the same time, the big win change stops first, reducing the occurrence of a small win causing a big win to be forcibly stopped in a miss mode.

As shown in FIG. 105(e), the special pattern 1 identification symbol 4601 for performance and the special pattern 2 identification symbol 4602 for performance fluctuate simultaneously, and when either one of the variations stops with a small win, as shown in FIG. 105(f), when one of the variations stops with a small win, the other variation stops in a miss mode. The special pattern 1 identification symbol 4601 for performance and the special pattern 2 identification symbol 4602 for performance fluctuate simultaneously, and when either one of the variations stops first with a big win, the other variation stops immediately after in a miss mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 106(a), when the special pattern 2 identification symbol 4602 for performance stops first in a big win mode, the special pattern 1 identification symbol 4601 for performance stops immediately or simultaneously in a miss mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 106(b), after the big win is notified, the game transitions to a big win game state. In the fifth pachinko game machine, after the big win game state ends, the machine transitions to a high probability time-saving game state (probability variable state and time-saving game state A) with 160 time-saving times. When the 160 time-saving times have been consumed, the machine transitions to the normal state.

106(c) and 106(d) show an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 4007 in a high-probability time-saving game state with 160 time-saving times, and various presentation images including a special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation, a special chart 2 identification pattern 4602 for presentation, special chart 1 reserved information 4611, and special chart 2 reserved information 4612 are displayed on the display device 4007. FIG. 106(e) shows an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 4007 in the next special chart change when 160 time-saving times are consumed and the high-probability time-saving game state ends, and the special chart 2 identification pattern 4602 for presentation and the special chart 2 reserved information 4612 are erased, and the change number information 4621 and the suggestion information 4622 are displayed. The change number information 4621 at this time is "0". Then, after the special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for the performance changes and stops to notify a small win or miss, the change count information 4621 becomes "1" as shown in FIG. 106(f). After that, the game is played in the normal state.

In addition, if both special charts 1 and 2 are big hits, the special chart that takes priority in the processing order of the program will be stopped as a big hit regardless of the change time, and the other special chart will be stopped as a miss. If both special charts 1 and 2 are small hits and stop changing at the same time, the special chart that takes priority in the processing order of the program will be stopped as a small hit, and the other special chart will be stopped as a miss.

In the fifth pachinko game machine described above, after the big win game state ends, the game transitions to a high probability time-saving game state with 160 time-saving times, but it is not limited to this. The time-saving game state is 210 times, and the high probability state (probability change state) is set up to the 160th time, and the low probability state (non-probability change state) is set up to the 161st to 210th times. Furthermore, in the low probability time-saving game state from the 161st to 210th times, the miss/small win fluctuation time for both special chart 1 and special chart 2 is set to be longer than the big win fluctuation time. For example, the miss/small win fluctuation time is set to 1 second, and the big win fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds. This allows the other to be stopped as a miss when one of the special charts 1 and 2 changes and to be stopped as a miss when either one is a big win. In other words, by creating a time-saving game state in which 50 big wins are not won, it becomes possible to earn the number of special chart fluctuations until the b time-saving entry in a short time. In addition, the time-saving game state described above is the a time-saving state, but a special state that can transition to the time-saving game state (c time-saving state) in the small win or loss stop state may be included, and the above-mentioned non-winning time-saving game may be executed a predetermined number of times in the c time-saving state. This further makes it possible to earn the number of special chart changes until the b time-saving entry in a short period of time.

The number of times the time-saving timers A and C can be shortened may be determined by random number lottery from among a number of times. For example, the number of times the time-saving timers A can be determined to be one of 160, 210, or 909 (160 + 749). If 909 times is selected, after the 160 times of the high-probability time-saving game state ends, the 749 times of the time-saving game state without a jackpot win will result in repeated special chart fluctuations while suppressing the consumption of held balls, so that it is guaranteed that the game will move to the time-saving timer B in a short time after the end of the high-probability time-saving game state.

[6-7. Effects of the fifth pachinko game machine]
According to the fifth pachinko gaming machine configured as described above, the following effects are achieved.
According to the fifth pachinko game machine, the simultaneous change of the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 is possible, and in the performance display by the display device 4007 in the low probability state before the b time reduction is reached, the performance display of the special chart 1 change and the number of times of the special chart 1 change are displayed, and the performance display of the special chart 2 change and the number of times of the special chart 2 change are not displayed, so that a difference is created between the actual number of times of the special chart change and the number of times of the change displayed, making it difficult for the player to understand the number of times of change (the ceiling number of times) until the b time reduction is reached. This makes the player feel that the time until the b time reduction is reached is short.

Also, the results of the lottery for special chart 1 and special chart 2 are mostly big wins or small wins, with very few misses, and since special chart 2 is a long-changing chart under normal circumstances, special chart 1 often stops while special chart 2 is changing, and the stopping of special chart 1 causes special chart 2 to be forcibly stopped in a miss mode. At this time, the number of times special chart 1 changes and the number of times special chart 2 changes increase at the same time, but the number of times special chart 1 changes is displayed in a special display, and the number of times special chart 2 changes is not displayed in a special display. This makes it possible to differentiate between the actual number of times special chart changes and the number of times displayed in a special display, making it difficult for players to understand the number of times of changes (ceiling number of times) until b time reduction is reached.

In addition, it is equipped with time reduction a and time reduction c, and during the time reduction, the special chart 1 change and the special chart 2 change are both set so that the change time for a big win is significantly longer than the change time for a small win or a miss. Therefore, when either the special chart 1 change or the special chart 2 change stops for a small win, the other will stop for a miss even if it is a big win. Furthermore, since the change time for a small win or a miss is relatively short, a time reduction state that makes it difficult to get a big win is executed a predetermined number of times. This makes it possible to pile up a predetermined number of special chart changes in a short period of time, and as a result, it becomes possible to earn the number of changes (ceiling number of times) until the time reduction b is reached, making the player feel that the time until the time reduction b is reached is short.

In addition, when the b time reduction is entered, the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the small jackpot or miss. Therefore, if the result of the special chart 1 and special chart 2 lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot is more likely to stop on the special chart first, making it possible to transition to the jackpot game state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to a short time, for example, 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the small jackpot or miss is set to a short time, for example, 1 second, so the special chart lottery is consumed quickly after the b time reduction is entered.

Although the fifth pachinko game machine has been described above, it is also possible to partially modify the fifth pachinko game machine. For example, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the first start hole 4120A and the second start hole 4140 are arranged separately, but a mechanism may be provided to allow the game ball that has entered the center hole to enter the first start hole 4120A and the second start hole 4140 alternately. As a result, in the normal state, the opportunities for the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 to fluctuate simultaneously increase, and after the special chart 2 stops at the same time as the special chart 1 stops, the opportunities for the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 to start fluctuating simultaneously increase, and the special chart 2 fluctuation is often forcibly stopped in a losing state. As a result, it is possible to differentiate between the actual number of times the special chart fluctuates and the number of times the fluctuation is displayed in the performance, making it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the fluctuation (ceiling number of times) until the b time reduction is reached.

In addition, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the game ball that enters the normal electric role 4146 enters the first start port 4120B, but the game ball that enters the normal electric role 4146 may be distributed to the first start port and the second start port, respectively. This increases the opportunities for the special chart 1 stop and the special chart 2 to stop simultaneously on the occasion of a small win or miss, and then for the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 to start fluctuating simultaneously, making it possible to consume the number of time-saving times in the time-saving game state at high speed. As a result, it becomes possible to earn the number of fluctuations (ceiling number of times) until the b time-saving is reached, so that the player can feel the time until the b time-saving is reached is short. It is also possible to apply the start winning role unit 3150 installed in the fourth pachinko game machine. In this case, it becomes possible to change the frequency of winning to the first start port and the second start port by changing the distribution of the time when the distribution device is on and off during the time when the normal electric role is in the open state. For example, if the time when the distribution device is turned on and off is the same, the special chart 1 reserve and the special chart 2 reserve will increase in the same way, and if the time when the distribution device is turned on is short and the time when it is turned off is long, the special chart 1 reserve will increase easily and the special chart 2 reserve will not increase easily. In this way, it is possible to adjust the increase in the number of times that the special chart 2, which is not displayed on the display device 4007 during the time reduction, changes. Note that, according to the fifth pachinko game machine described above, the number of times of operation n does not include the number of times of change in the high probability state (probability change state), but this does not exclude the inclusion of the number of times. Specifically, after changing 160 times in the high probability time reduction state, changing 590 times in the normal state (low probability non-time reduction state), when a total of 750 times is reached, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) may be activated.

[6-8. Modification of the fifth pachinko gaming machine]
Below, a modified example of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

[6-8-1. Modification 1]
107 is an explanatory diagram showing a game board unit of the modified example 1 of the fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit of the modified example 1 is configured such that the second start hole 4140 arranged directly below the first start hole 4120A in the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 101 is deleted, and the game ball that enters the normal electric role 4146 passes through the second start hole 4140.

[Specifications of Modification 1]
In the first modification, regardless of whether the game state is a probability state (high probability state) or a non-probability state (low probability state), the game state transitions to a time-saving game state (b time-saving) on the condition that the special chart fluctuation has been consumed a specified number of times. In the first modification, the game state transitions to a time-saving game state (b time-saving) on the condition that the special chart fluctuation has been consumed 100 times. In this time-saving game state (b time-saving), for example, 60 time-saving times are granted.

If a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery in the low probability state, the game will transition to a jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state ends, in most cases the game will transition to a high probability non-time-limited game state (latent probability change). In the special chart 1 lottery in the high probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the low probability state, but in most cases the game will transition to a high probability non-time-limited game state (latent probability change). Also, in the special chart 1 lottery in the high probability state, there is a high probability of winning a small jackpot. The high probability non-time-limited game state (latent probability change) will continue until the number of times the special chart changes reaches 100.

If you win the jackpot in the low probability special drawing 2, you will enter a jackpot game state where you can win a large number of prize balls, and after the jackpot game state ends, you will enter a high probability time-saving game state. This high probability time-saving game state ends, for example, when the special drawing changes 160 times.

[Gaming state transition in modified example 1]
FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first modified example, and in the normal game state, the game is advanced by hitting from the left. When the first hit, that is, when the special chart 1 big hit is won in the normal game state, in most cases, after the big hit game ends, the game transitions to a high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change). In the high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change), the game is advanced by hitting from the left. When the special chart 1 big hit is won in the high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change), after the big hit game ends, the game transitions to a high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change). At this time, the count value of the number of times the special chart changes until the b time reduction is reached is reset. When the special chart 1 small hit is won in the high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change), the game transitions to a small hit game state. In the high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change), when a special chart 1 big hit or small hit is won, the game ball is passed through the big prize entry port 4131, and after the big hit game or small hit game ends, the game ball is switched to right hitting, and the game ball is passed through the big prize entry port 4131, and after the big hit game or small hit game ends, the game ball is switched to left hitting. In the high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change), it is easy to win a small hit, so it is in a so-called small hit RUSH state, but the small hit probability is set so that the game ball does not increase in the high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change). In the high probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change), the special chart 1 is mainly changed as a left hit consumption, but it may be mainly changed as a right hit consumption. Also, there may be no small hit in the special chart 1 lottery, and the special chart 2 lottery may be tried to win a small hit with a high probability.

When the count value of the number of times the special chart changes in the high-probability non-time-saving play state reaches 100 times, the game transitions to a low-probability time-saving play state and time-saving b is activated. In variant 1, 60 time-saving times are granted, but this is not the only option. In time-saving b state, play is progressed by hitting the right, and when time-saving b is activated, an image encouraging hitting the right, such as "hit right," is displayed on the display device 4007. If a special chart 2 jackpot is won in time-saving b state, the game transitions to a jackpot play state and many prize balls are won, and then the game transitions to a high-probability time-saving play state. When 60 time-saving times are consumed in time-saving b state, the game transitions to the normal play state.

If you win the Special Chart 2 jackpot while in the high probability time-saving play state, you will transition to the jackpot play state and win many prize balls, after which you will transition to the high probability time-saving play state. When 160 time-saving turns have been used up in the high probability time-saving play state, you will transition to the normal play state.

In other words, according to variant example 1, the key to winning a large number of prize balls is how quickly 100 time-saving cycles are consumed in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (latent probability change) to transition to the time-saving game state (time-saving b), and winning the jackpot in the time-saving game state (time-saving b). In this way, it is possible to provide an innovative gaming machine that adds excitement to the game by transitioning from the high-probability non-time-saving game state to the low-probability time-saving game state (time-saving b).

[6-8-2. Modification 2]
Next, a description will be given of Modification 2 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The game board unit of Modification 2 is similar to the game board unit 4010 of Modification 1 shown in Fig. 107, and therefore a detailed description will be omitted.

[Specifications of Modification 2]
In the second modified example, the probability of winning the lottery for the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 is the same, for example, 1/300 in the low probability state and 1/99 in the high probability state. When the lottery for the special chart 1 or the special chart 2 is won, after the jackpot game ends, the game moves to a high probability state (probability change state) and a first time-saving game state (a time-saving). Specifically, the number of times of probability change and time-saving changes to a high probability time-saving game state of 160 times, and when the time-saving times of 160 times are consumed, the game moves to a normal game state.

Moreover, variant 2 is equipped with a b time-saving function, and is set so that the number of time-saving times (time-saving times N) granted when entering b time-saving is greater than the number of special chart changes (number of times of operation n) required to activate b time-saving. Specifically, the number of times of operation n is 750, and the number of times of time-saving N is 800. Note that the number of times of operation n also includes the number of time-saving times consumed in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving).

[Gaming state transition in modified example 2]
FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of game states in the second modified example. In the normal game state, the game is played by hitting from the left, and the special chart 1 lottery is mainly performed. If a special chart 1 jackpot is won in the normal game state, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state with 160 time-saving times. In the high-probability time-saving game state, the game is played by hitting from the right, and the special chart 2 lottery is mainly performed. If a special chart 2 jackpot is won in the normal game state, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a high-probability time-saving game state with 160 time-saving times. In the high-probability time-saving game state, when 160 time-saving times are consumed, the game transitions to the normal game state.

In the normal game state, if the number of special chart changes reaches 750 times, the game will move to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), which is a low-probability time-saving game state, and 800 time-saving times will be granted. In the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the game is played by hitting the right, and the special chart 2 lottery is mainly held. If a special chart 2 jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the jackpot game ends, the game will move to the first time-saving game state (high-probability time-saving game state) with 160 time-saving times. If 750 special chart changes are consumed without a special chart 2 jackpot in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), 800 time-saving times will be granted. Furthermore, if 1500 special chart changes are consumed since the start of the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), and the number of time-saving times remains at 100, an additional 800 time-saving times will be added.

In this way, according to variant 2, when the player transitions to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the number of time-saving turns is added every time 750 special chart changes are consumed, so the second time-saving game state will essentially continue until a jackpot is won. This makes it possible for the player to play while minimizing the consumption of balls, even if the player falls into a so-called stuck state in which a jackpot cannot be won for a long period of time after transitioning to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving).

In addition, in the second modification, when a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, the probability of transitioning to a high probability non-time-limited game state (latent probability change) may be included after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the probability of transitioning to a high probability non-time-limited game state (latent probability change) may be higher than the probability of transitioning to another game state (first time-limited game state or normal state).

[6-8-3. Modification 3]
Next, a description will be given of Modification 3 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The game board unit of Modification 3 is similar to the game board unit 4010 shown in Fig. 107, and therefore a detailed description will be omitted.

[Specifications of Modification 3]
In the third modification, the probability of winning the lottery for the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 is common, for example, 1/300 in the low probability state and 1/99 in the high probability state. If the lottery for the special chart 1 or the special chart 2 is a jackpot, the game will transition to a high probability state (probability change state) and a first time-saving game state (a time-saving state) after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, in the case of a first jackpot, i.e., if a jackpot is won during normal play, the game will transition to a first time-saving play state (a time-saving) where the number of chance turns is 10 and the number of time-saving turns is 746. In the case of a jackpot during time-saving play, after the jackpot play ends, the game will transition to a first time-saving play state (a time-saving) where the number of chance turns is 10 and the number of time-saving turns is 10. After the jackpot play ends, if 10 special chart changes have been consumed, the game will transition to the normal play state.

Modification 3 is also equipped with a b time-saving function, and the number of times the special chart changes (number of activations n) required to activate the second time-saving play state (b time-saving) is set to be greater than the number of time-saving times granted when entering a time-saving play state. Specifically, the number of activations n is 750 times, and the number of time-saving times N can be set appropriately, but is set to 100 times, for example. Also, if a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery in a low-probability non-time-saving play state, 10,000 time-saving times are granted. Note that the number of activations n also includes the number of time-saving times consumed in the first time-saving play state (a time-saving play state).

[Gaming state transition in modified example 3]
110 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the modified example 3. In the normal game state, the game is played by hitting from the left, and the lottery for the special chart 1 is mainly performed. When the special chart 1 jackpot is won in the normal game state (first win), after the jackpot game ends, the game moves to the first time-saving game state with 10 chances and 746 time-saving times. When the special chart 1 jackpot is won in the time-saving game state (time-saving a or time-saving b), after the jackpot game ends, the game moves to the first time-saving game state with 10 chances and 10 time-saving times.

After the first hit, when the special chart fluctuation of 746 times is consumed, if there is a special chart 2 reserved, if a jackpot is won with this special chart 2 reserved, the game will move to the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, the game will move to the first time-saving game state with a probability of 10 times and a time-saving game state of 10,000 times. If a jackpot is not won with the special chart 2 reserved, the game will move to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) on the condition that the number of times the special chart changes reaches 750 times. After the first hit, if there are four special chart 2 reserved at the time when the time-saving number of 746 times is consumed, the game will move to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) after the four special chart 2 reserved are consumed without winning a jackpot. If there are three or less special chart 2 reserved, the game will move to the normal game state once after the special chart 2 reserved is consumed without winning a jackpot. Then, after special chart 1 changes 1 to 3 times by hitting the left side, the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving).
In the third modified example, even if the game transitions to a non-time-saving game state when 746 special chart variations have been consumed, if there are four special chart 2 reserved at that time, an image promoting left hitting is not displayed on the display device 4007. If there are three or fewer special chart 2 reserved, an image promoting left hitting is displayed on the display device 4007. Then, after transitioning to the second time-saving game state (time-saving b), an image promoting right hitting is displayed on the display device 4007.

After a jackpot during time-saving, if there is a reserved special chart 2 at the time when the 10 time-saving special chart changes have been consumed, if a jackpot is won with this reserved special chart 2, the game will transition to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, the game will transition to a first time-saving game state with a 10-time probability change state and 10,000 time-saving times. If a jackpot is not won with the reserved special chart 2, the game will transition to a second time-saving game state (b time-saving) on the condition that the number of times the special chart has changed has reached 750. After a jackpot during time-saving, just like after the first jackpot, a performance image encouraging left or right hits depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 is displayed on the display device 4007.

In addition, in the third modification, when a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, the possibility of transitioning to a high probability non-time-limited game state (latent probability change) may be included after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the probability of transitioning to a high probability non-time-limited game state (latent probability change) may be higher than the probability of transitioning to another game state (first time-limited game state or normal state).

The above-mentioned modified example 3 can also be applied to a pachinko machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, such as the third pachinko machine. In the above-mentioned type 1/2 pachinko machine, if a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, 10,000 time-saving times are awarded. In the pachinko machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, if a small jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in a low-probability non-time-saving game state, it is easier to win a V prize. Specifically, the special electric device 4133 of the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 107 is provided with a V prize opening and a V shutter, like the V prize device provided in the third pachinko machine. Here, in the type 1/2 pachinko machine, even if a small jackpot is won during the time-saving game, the normal electric device 4146 captures the game ball on the upstream side, so the game ball is unlikely to head toward the special electric device 4133. Therefore, a long variation may be set as a variation pattern of the normal symbol, and during the long variation, the normal electric device 4146 may not operate, and the game ball may be directed toward the special electric device 4133 downstream of the normal electric device 4146.

[6-8-4. Modification 4]
Next, a fourth modified example of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described.
FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing a game board unit of the modified example 4. The game board unit of the modified example 4 is configured such that the second start hole 4140 arranged directly below the first start hole 4120A in the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 101 is deleted, and the second start hole 4140B is provided downstream of the special electric role 4133 as shown in FIG. 111, and further, the game ball that has won the normal electric role 4146 passes through the second start hole 4140A. The game ball that has passed through the second start hole 4140A and the second start hole 4140B is detected by the second start hole switch 4141. The game nails around the second start hole 4140B are arranged on the board surface so that one ball wins out of several game balls that have not won the special electric role 4133. The other configurations of the game board unit of the modified example 4 are the same as those of the game board unit 4010 shown in FIG. 101, so detailed explanations are omitted.

[Specifications of Modification 4]
In the third modified example, there are a probability jackpot and a normal jackpot as the jackpot by the special chart 1 and special chart 2 lottery. In the case of a probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game moves to a high probability time-saving game state of a high probability state (probability jackpot state) and a first time-saving game state (a time-saving). In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game moves to a low probability state (non-probability jackpot state) and a normal game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) in which time-saving is not given. The probability of a jackpot is, for example, 1/300 at low probability and 1/150 at high probability for both the special chart 1 and special chart 2 lottery, and the rate at which the jackpot becomes a probability jackpot is, for example, 50%. In addition, there is no small jackpot in the special chart 1 lottery, and the special chart 2 lottery is designed to have a high probability of winning a small jackpot. In addition, in the high probability time-saving game state, the number of probability jackpots is 750 times, and the number of time-saving times is 700 times.
In addition, the modified example 3 is equipped with a b time-saving function, and the number of times of special chart fluctuation (number of times of operation n) that is the condition for activating the b time-saving function is 750 times. The number of times of time-saving in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is 1000 times. Note that the number of times of operation n includes the number of times of time-saving consumed in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving).

[Gaming state transition in modified example 4]
FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the modified example 4. In the normal game state, the game is played by hitting the left hand, and the special drawing 1 is mainly performed. When the special drawing 1 jackpot is won in the normal game state, if it is a special jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a high probability time-saving game state in which the number of times of the special jackpot is 750 and the number of times of the time-saving game is 700, which is the first time-saving game state. If it is a normal jackpot, the game transitions to the normal game state. If the jackpot is won during the number of times of the special jackpot is 750, after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a high probability time-saving game state or a normal game state based on the jackpot stop pattern.

In the high probability time-saving game state, it is advantageous for the player to play by hitting from the right, and as the game ball passes through the passing gate 4126, the normal chart changes in a short time, and most of these result in small wins. Here, during the execution of a small win game, the normal electric device 4146 captures the game ball upstream of the special electric device 4133, making it difficult to win a prize ball by entering the large winning hole 4131 in the small win game state.

After the big win game state ends, when 700 time-saving times are consumed, the high probability time-saving game state transitions to the high probability non-time-saving game state. Even if the game transitions to the high probability non-time-saving game state, you can win a small win with a high probability by continuing to hit the right and making the game ball enter the second starting hole 4140B during the remaining 50 times of the probability change. At this time, the game has transitioned from the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) to the non-time-saving game state, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern has switched to long fluctuation, so the game ball that passed without being captured by the normal electric role 4146 during this long fluctuation will head toward the special electric role 4133, making it possible for it to enter the large winning hole 4131. Therefore, during the remaining 50 times of the probability change, it becomes a so-called small win RUSH, in which it is possible to win a small win with a high probability and win prize balls by playing the small win. If a special 2 jackpot occurs during a small jackpot rush, the game will transition to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game ends, the game will transition to a high probability time-saving game state or a normal game state based on the jackpot stop pattern. Note that this is not the only case where a special 2 jackpot occurs during a small jackpot rush, and the jackpot game may be played after the small jackpot rush ends.

Then, when the remaining 50 times of the special chance are consumed, the game will transition to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) with 1000 time-saving times. If a jackpot is hit in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the jackpot game ends, the game will transition to a high-probability time-saving game state or a normal game state based on the jackpot stopping symbol. When 1000 time-saving times have been consumed, the game will transition from the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) to the normal game state.

According to variant 4, which is configured in this way, even if a jackpot game ends and the game transitions to a high probability time-saving game state, and the player continues to be unable to win a jackpot, it is possible to provide the player with a new interest in winning a small jackpot rush and time-saving by performing special chart fluctuations a specified number of times.

In addition, in variant 4, if a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, the game may transition to a high probability non-time-limited game state (latent high probability) after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the rate at which the jackpot will be a high probability jackpot may be set to 50%, and the probability of transitioning to a high probability non-time-limited game state (latent high probability) may be higher than transitioning to other game states (first time-limited game state or normal state).

[6-8-5. Modification 5]
Next, the fifth modified example of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described. The fifth modified example is a modified example of the fifth pachinko game machine, in which the variable pattern table is switched only when the b time reduction is reached (the ceiling is reached) in the fifth pachinko game machine, and the b time reduction is started from a specific performance.

Figure 113 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed in S107 of Figure 21, where the main CPU 4201 performs a process to determine whether the number of times the special symbol variation has been activated is n (S4710). If the number of times it has been activated is n, a special variation pattern table is selected (S4720), and if the number of times it has been activated is not n, a variation pattern table is selected (S4730), and the variation pattern is determined (S4740).

The special fluctuation pattern determined using the special fluctuation pattern table is a long fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and a special fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the special fluctuation pattern is sent from the main control circuit 4200 to the sub-control circuit 4300, and the sub-CPU 4301 of the sub-control circuit 4300 receives the special fluctuation pattern command, and then executes a performance that notifies the start of the time-saving mode from a specific performance after starting the special chart fluctuation for the performance. In the fifth modified example, since the number of operations n is 750, the long fluctuation pattern is selected every 750 times.

According to variant 5 configured in this way, a long fluctuation pattern is selected every 750 times, and a specific effect is executed, making it possible to impress upon the player that they have entered the b time-saving period.

Figure 114 is an example of a specific performance executed in a long variation pattern, and as shown in Figure 114 (a), during the variation of the second identification pattern 4602 for the performance, the variation display of text information is performed in the special pattern 2 reserved information 4612 for the performance corresponding to the 750th variation. Then, as shown in Figure 114 (b), the special pattern 2 reserved information 4612 is displayed large at the 751st variation, and as shown in Figure 114 (c), before the second identification pattern 4602 for the performance stops, the variation display of the special pattern 2 reserved information 4612 stops and displays "time reduction". This notifies the player of the transition to time reduction. In addition, if the variation is a jackpot, as shown in Figure 114 (d), "win" is displayed. This notifies the player that the variation is a jackpot. Also, if a player knows the number of times the special pattern has changed, it becomes possible to predict the entry into the second time reduction game state (b time reduction) at the time when the reserved notice appears. In addition, when the c time-saving function is installed, if there is a special mode in the reserved state, the reserved state may be subjected to the performance as shown in FIG. 114. Also, according to FIG. 114, the character information change display is performed in the special chart 2 reserved information 4612 for performance, but it is not limited to this, and the character information change may be displayed in another display area of the display device 4007 instead of the special chart 2 reserved information 4612, and "time-saving" may be displayed at the time of the 750th special chart change. In this case, if the character change is performed in the special chart 2 reserved information 4612, it is possible to display the character change from the 746th special chart change, which is four changes before, but if the character change is displayed alone, it is possible to display the character information change at an earlier timing, for example, at the start of the 740th change.

The special effect shown in FIG. 114 may be executed only when the number of times the special chart changes reaches the number of times n that it is activated. In this case, the player can be notified that the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is approaching when the special effect appears. Also, if there is a reserve that will be a jackpot by predicting the reserve before the reserve with the number of times n that it is activated, the special effect shown in FIG. 114 may not be executed. This makes it possible to reduce the disappointment felt by the player that a jackpot will be hit before entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) and that the player will not be able to play in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when there are multiple reserved balls for special chart changes and there are several reserved balls before the reserved ball corresponding to the 750th change, a countdown display may be performed as shown in FIG. 115. Specifically, assume that there are four reserved balls, and the fourth reserved ball based on the last start winning is the 751st change. Then, in the next special chart change, "3" is displayed as shown in FIG. 115(a), in the next special chart change, "2" is displayed as shown in FIG. 115(b), and in the next special chart change, "1" is displayed as shown in FIG. 115(c), and at the start of the 751st special chart change, an image is displayed that notifies the player of the start of the b time reduction and encourages the player to hit the right, saying "Ceiling mode starts, hit right!". Note that, as shown in FIG. 115(d), the countdown display can be performed even if there is no reserved ball corresponding to the 751st change in the reserved balls. For example, when there is a reserved ball that executes a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, a countdown display may be performed, and then "super hot" may be displayed as shown in FIG. 115(e) to notify the player of the reliability of the change. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 115(f), a display may be displayed to inform the player of the remaining number of special chart changes until the b time-saving mode is entered, such as "123 more times until the ceiling mode is entered!" By making these announcements using the same type of presentation, the player can simultaneously feel the expectation of the time-saving mode being granted and the expectation of the big win being granted, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[6-8-6. Modification 6]
Next, the fifth pachinko game machine variant 6 will be described. In variant 6, in variant 4 of the fifth pachinko game machine, the big prize winning hole is opened and closed twice in a small win game with a total opening time of about 1.8 seconds or less, and a two-round big win with a total opening time of about 1.8 seconds or less is added, and the number of operations n is reset when the two-round big win is won. The opening of the big prize winning hole may be the same operation for a small win and a big win. In variant 4, it is preferable that the game board unit enters the same big prize winning hole in the small win game state and the big win game state. This makes it more difficult to distinguish between a small win game and a big win game.

116 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation display when a small win or a two-round jackpot is won. When a small win or a two-round jackpot is won, as shown in FIG. 116(a), a presentation display is performed in which the text information "123 times until the ceiling mode" and the text information "750 times until the ceiling mode" push against each other from side to side, and when a small win is won, as shown in FIG. 116(b), a display is performed to notify the current remaining number of special chart changes until the b time reduction mode is entered, "123 times until the ceiling mode". When a two-round jackpot is won, as shown in FIG. 116(c), a display is performed to notify the reset remaining number of special chart changes, "750 times until the ceiling mode". This presentation display appears when a two-round jackpot is won and when it is decided to execute a presentation to notify the remaining number of special chart changes until the b time reduction mode is entered. The presentation to notify the remaining number of special chart changes may be a presentation that suggests the remaining number of special chart changes.

According to variant 6 configured in this way, it is possible to provide new gameplay that enhances the player's interest in whether or not the number of remaining special chart changes until the b time-saving period is entered is reset.

[6-8-7. Other Modifications]
The fifth pachinko game machine has been described above in terms of modified examples 1 to 6, but the fifth pachinko game machine modified examples are not limited to those described above. For example, modified examples 1 to 6 are equipped with a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) and a second time-saving game state (b time-saving), but the base value in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) may be higher than the base value in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), or the base value in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) may be greater than 100. For example, a plurality of special chart 2 variation pattern tables are provided during the b time-saving, and each special chart 2 variation pattern table has a different variation time, and the special chart 2 has a high probability of winning a small prize. As a result, when a long variation pattern table is selected, the number of small winnings per unit time is small, so the number of prize balls per unit time decreases, and the base value becomes a low value not exceeding 100, but when a short variation pattern table is selected, the number of small winnings per unit time increases, so the number of prize balls per unit time increases, and the base value becomes a high value exceeding 100. In addition, in the above-mentioned fifth pachinko game machine modification example, the value of the number of operation times n, which is the condition for entering the b time reduction, is fixed, but the value of the number of operation times n may be multiple. For example, when the power is turned on or when the jackpot game ends, the number of operation times n may be determined by random number lottery from multiple candidate times. At this time, if the number of operation times n is satisfied during the a time reduction, the b time reduction may not be activated. Also, for example, as in modification example 4, the number of time reductions may be increased for jackpots after the ceiling is reached compared to jackpots before the ceiling is reached (b time reduction). This makes it possible to increase the expected value of the total number of balls that can be obtained after the ceiling is reached.

According to the fifth pachinko game machine and its variants described above, by incorporating b-time reduction, which can be considered a ceiling time reduction, it is possible to differentiate between the amount of balls awarded after the ceiling is reached and the amount of balls awarded before the ceiling is reached, which can increase the interest of the game.

[7. The 6th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine like the third pachinko game machine, and as described in detail in the description of the third pachinko game machine, there are a first route and a second route as routes until the machine is controlled to a big win game state. The first route is when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big win" is derived. The second route is when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "gimmick opening hit" is derived, causing the V attacker to open, and the game ball that entered the opened V attacker enters the V winning hole in the V attacker.
The structure and electrical structure of the game board unit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine are the same as those of the third pachinko gaming machine, and therefore detailed description will be omitted. In the following description of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the reference numerals used in the description of the third pachinko gaming machine will be used.

The sixth pachinko gaming machine differs from the third pachinko gaming machine in basic specifications, and in particular in that it has a plurality of limiter numbers.
FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in the sixth pachinko game machine. The process shown in FIG. 117 is the process shown in FIG. 29 with the addition of the limiter number management process of S204. In the limiter number management process, the main CPU 2201 sets the limiter number based on the number of special pattern changes until the jackpot when the jackpot is from a low probability state (non-probability variable state). Also, when the jackpot is from a probability variable state, the number of jackpot loops is counted. Then, when the number of jackpot loops reaches the limiter number, the state is shifted to a low probability state.

[7-1. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained.

[7-1-1. Limiter count]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, a limiter number is set, and in the pachinko game machine, the limiter number can be set to "3" or "7". Specifically, when a jackpot is acquired in the range of special jackpot random numbers 1 to 100, the limit is set to 3 times, when a jackpot is acquired in the range of special jackpot random numbers 51 to 100, the limit is set to 7 times, when a jackpot is acquired with a random number value of special jackpot random numbers 101 or later, the limit is set to 3 times. The special random number range in which the limit is set to 3 times and the special random number range in which the limit is set to 7 times can be set as appropriate. The limiter number can also be set as appropriate.
In addition, the selection ratio of the multiple limit numbers may be different between special chart 1 and special chart 2. In addition, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, the limit number is set according to the special chart random number range, but the limit number may be set according to a specific special chart variable number range.

According to the sixth pachinko game machine, for example, if the first jackpot occurs at the 200th special chart change and the limit is set to 3 times, the limiter number of times is reached when the jackpot that transitions to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is won four times in a row, including the first jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, and the jackpot (fourth jackpot) at the time the limiter number of times is reached is controlled so that it does not transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game ends. Note that "four times in a row" means that the jackpot game state and the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) are alternately repeated, and the jackpot that transitions to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is executed four times in a row. Note that in the case of a jackpot game when the limiter number of times is reached, it is controlled so that it does not transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game state ends, but this is only due to the count number of the counter that manages whether the limiter number of times is reached or not. In other words, if a jackpot is won that transitions to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game state ends unless the limiter number of times has been reached (if the random number drawn by the special pattern lottery is a random number that determines a jackpot and selects a special pattern that transitions to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving)), the count number of the counter that manages whether or not the limiter number of times has been reached is updated. Then, as a result of it being determined that the limiter number of times has been reached, control is exercised so that the transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) does not occur after the jackpot game state ends. In the sixth pachinko game machine, after the jackpot game state ends, the game transitions to a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in which the number of time-saving times is 1 or 100. However, if a jackpot that does not transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game state ends is won before the limiter number of times is reached (before four consecutive jackpots that transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game state ends are won), the number of times that manages whether the limiter number of times has been reached at that point is reset (updated to 0, an initial value, etc.).

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the limiter count is defined as the upper limit of the number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop count") between a jackpot game state and a game state in which high probability variable control is executed (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), but it can also be defined by the number of consecutive jackpots obtained by repetition between a jackpot game state and a game state in which high probability variable control is executed.

[7-1-2. Big hit, small hit probability]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, when the main CPU 2201 detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2120, it draws a special chart 1 and makes a jackpot determination based on the extracted random number for jackpot determination.

In addition, when the main CPU 2201 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2140, it performs a special chart 2 lottery and performs a jackpot determination based on the extracted random number for jackpot determination.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the probability of the first special symbol drawing being a big hit is approximately 1/319, and the probability of it being a small hit is 0. The probability of the second special symbol drawing being a big hit is approximately 1/319, and the probability of it being a small hit is 1/3.75. In other words, since there is a possibility of a small hit, the probability of losing is lower with the special symbol 2 drawing than with the special symbol 1 drawing.

[7-1-3. Number of winning balls]
In the sixth pachinko game machine, the number of prize balls awarded for winning the open/close winning port 2151 is "10", the number of prize balls awarded for winning the large winning port 2131 is "10", the number of prize balls awarded for winning the first starting port 2120 is "4", the number of prize balls awarded for winning the second starting port 2140 is "4", and the number of prize balls awarded for winning the general winning port 2122 is "4".

[7-1-4. Count number of big win and small win game states]
In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in a round game in a big win gaming state is nine, and the count number (maximum number of balls entered) in a small win gaming state is ten.

[7-1-5. Jackpot distribution]
In the case of winning the jackpot by the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery, the number of rounds is selected as either "10 times" or "6 times" depending on the jackpot mode of the special pattern. The probability of the number of rounds being "10 times" is 0.5%, and the probability of the number of rounds being "6 times" is 99.5%. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning hole 2155 in the small jackpot game state and the game transitions to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds is selected as either "10 times" or "6 times" depending on the small jackpot mode of the second special pattern. The probability of the number of rounds being "10 times" is 0.5%, and the probability of the number of rounds being "6 times" is 99.5%. In addition, the special drawing 2 jackpot is a jackpot that does not go through a small jackpot.

[7-1-6. Time-saving allocation]
In the case of a special pattern 1 jackpot or a special pattern 2 jackpot, the game moves to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game state ends. At this time, either "100 times" or "1 time" is selected as the number of time-saving times depending on the jackpot mode of the special pattern. In the special pattern 1 jackpot, the probability that the number of time-saving times will be "100 times" is 50%, and the probability that the number of time-saving times will be "1 time" is 50%. More specifically, there are 6R jackpots and 10R jackpots as special pattern 1 jackpots, and the jackpot with 1 time-saving time is 50% for the 6R jackpot, 49.5% for the 6R jackpot, and 0.5% for the 10R jackpot.

The probability that the number of time-saving times will be "100 times" in the special chart 2 big hit is 100%. Also, if the ball enters the V winning hole 2155 during a small hit game state and transitions to a big hit game state, the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the big hit game state ends, and the number of time-saving times "100 times" will be granted. In addition, if the ball does not enter the V winning hole 2155 during a small hit game state, the game state after the small hit game state ends will be maintained as the game state before the small hit game state ends. In other words, if the game state before the small hit game state ends is the normal game state, the game state after the small hit game state ends will be the normal game state, and if the game state before the small hit game state ends is the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the game state after the small hit game state ends will be the first time-saving game state (a time-saving). In this case, the number of time-saving times will also be the same as before the small win game state ended. In the following explanation, the ball entering the V winning hole 2155 may simply be referred to as a V winning.

In addition, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, when a player wins the special drawing 2 and transitions to a jackpot game state (including a small win and a jackpot via a V prize), the game state will always end in a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in which 100 times of time-saving are granted after the end of the jackpot game state, but this is not limited to this. When a player wins a small win in the special drawing 2 and transitions to a jackpot game state via a V prize, 100 times of time-saving may be granted after the end of the jackpot game state, and when a player enters a jackpot game state without winning a small win in the special drawing 2 and transitioning to a V prize, one time of time-saving may be granted after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, 10% of 6R jackpots in at least one of the special drawing 2 and special drawing 1 may be jackpots that do not transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving). In the sixth pachinko game machine, 0.5% is a 10R jackpot, so the remaining 89.5% of special charts 1 and 2 are 6R jackpots that transition to time-saving. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery during the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the game may be controlled to transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 100 time-savings, or it may be controlled to win a jackpot that does not transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving). It is also possible to express not transitioning to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) as "the number of time-savings is 0".

In addition, in the big win game state, it is possible to play in rounds, while the small win game state does not basically include rounds. In the small win game state, it is possible to open and close the big prize opening, which does not operate the continuous operation device of the role. Here, after the big win game state ends, it is possible to transition to a game state that is more advantageous to the player (for example, the first time-saving game state (time-saving a)), but basically, after the small win game state ends, the player is not allowed to transition to a game state that is more advantageous than before the transition to the small win game state.

However, if a large prize opening (second large prize opening 2131) equipped with a specific area (V prize opening 2155) opens during a small prize game state, and the condition device is activated by the game ball passing through the specific area (V prize opening 2155), and the role-playing device is activated, then after the small prize game state ends, the game transitions to a large prize game state, which is an advantageous game state for the player. At this time, the small prize game state may also be counted in the number of rounds.

Also, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, there is no difference in round allocation between the jackpot game state triggered by the special drawing 2 lottery and the jackpot game state triggered by the special drawing 1, but the round allocation in the jackpot game state triggered by the special drawing 2 lottery may be easier to win a jackpot with a larger number of rounds than the round allocation in the jackpot game state triggered by the special drawing 1 lottery. Or, the number of time-saving times granted after the jackpot game state ends may be larger for the jackpot triggered by the special drawing 2 lottery than for the jackpot triggered by the special drawing 1 lottery. Also, when the jackpot game state is transitioned to by the special drawing 2 lottery or the special drawing 1 lottery during the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the number of time-saving times executed after the jackpot game state ends is preferably 100 times as long as the limiter has not been reached, but even during the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), a number less than 100 times may be granted. Here, when the game transitions to the jackpot game state due to the drawing of special chart 2 or special chart 1 during normal game mode, one time of time reduction is granted, but in the same way, one time of time reduction may be granted for a number less than 100 times. Furthermore, it is possible to set the time reduction to 0 times even when the limit number of times has not been reached.

In addition, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, a b time-saving function is installed, and when the special pattern changes in the low probability state reach a specified number of times (for example, 750 times), the game transitions to a second time-saving game state (b time-saving). The second time-saving game state (b time-saving) continues until either of the following conditions is met: five special pattern 1 changes or one special pattern 2 change, and when the condition is met, the game transitions to a normal game state.

[7-2. Game Flow]
FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game using the sixth pachinko gaming machine of the present invention.

In most cases, the game starts in the normal game state. In the normal game state, the player hits the ball from the left and plays the game with the aim of winning the first starting hole 2120. The ball winning the first starting hole 2120 triggers a special pattern 1 lottery, and if the special pattern 1 lottery is won, the game moves to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, the game moves to a first time-saving game state (time-saving a) for one or 100 times. In the first time-saving game state (time-saving a), the player hits the ball from the right and plays the game with the aim of the game ball passing through the passing gate 2126. In the first time-saving game state (time-saving a), the game progresses with the aim of the game ball passing through the passing gate 2126, and the normal electric device 2146 becomes more likely to operate because the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the passing gate 2126 becomes high.

In the case where the number of time reductions is "1 time", when the first variation of the second special pattern stops in a losing mode, the first time reduction game state (a time reduction) ends and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery transitions to a low probability state. At this time, if there is a reserved special pattern 2 variation, the mode transitions to the pullback mode. If there is no reserved special pattern 2 variation, the mode transitions to the normal mode. Here, if there is a reserved special pattern 2 variation, the mode transitions to the first time reduction game state (a time reduction) and the first variation is the special pattern 2 variation. The variation time of this first special pattern 2 variation is made longer than the variation time of the special pattern 1 by 4 variations. If the reserved special pattern 2 variation stops in a big win mode, the mode transitions to a big win game state, if it stops in a small win mode, the mode transitions to a small win game state, and if a V is won in the small win game state, the mode transitions to a big win game state (hereinafter, this big win game state may be referred to as a V big win game state). After the jackpot game state ends, the machine transitions to the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) with a time-saving of "100 times." In the sixth pachinko game machine, the change in the first special symbol is not counted in the number of time-saving times. Therefore, when the special symbol 1 lottery is won for the first time and the time-saving "1 time" is granted after the jackpot game state ends, even if the special symbol 1 change is reserved and the special symbol 1 change is stopped due to the reservation, the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) does not end.

In addition, according to the above explanation, when the number of time-saving times is "1 time", when the variation of the second special pattern stops in a losing mode, the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) ends and the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery transitions to a low probability state. However, this is not limited to this, and if a small jackpot is won in the special pattern 2 lottery, the large prize winning hole 2131 is opened by the small jackpot, and the ball does not enter the specific area (V prize winning hole 2155), the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) may end after the small jackpot game state ends. In addition to the variation by special pattern 2, the end condition of the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) can be controlled so that it ends when the variation by special pattern 1 is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) when the variation by special pattern 2 is 1 time, or the number of times of winning small jackpots is controlled to end a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 time).

When the number of time-saving times is "100 times", when the variation of the second special symbol stops in a losing mode for the 100th time, the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) ends and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery transitions to a low probability state. At this time, if special symbol 2 is reserved, the game transitions to the pullback mode (final battle, described later). If special symbol 2 is not reserved, the game transitions to the normal game state. If the variation of the second special symbol stops in a winning mode before the number of time-saving times "100 times" is consumed, or if it stops in a small winning mode and the game transitions to a small winning game state, and if a V is won in the small winning game state, the game transitions to a V big winning game state. Then, after the V big winning game state ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) of "100 times".

The pull-back mode is entered when special symbol 2 is reserved after the first time-saving game state (time saving a) ends. Here, the pull-back mode is executed in the normal game state (a game state in which the probability of winning both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery is low). In the pull-back mode, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in a big win mode, or stops in a small win mode and the game state transitions to a small win game state, and if a V is won in the small win game state, the game state transitions to a V big win game state. Then, after the big win game state ends, the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state (time saving a) with the time saving of "100 times".

In addition, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the limit, the game will transition to normal game mode. When the game transitions to normal game mode, the limiter number is reset. If there is a Special Chart 2 variation pending when the game transitions to normal game mode, the pullback mode will start. If there is no Special Chart 2 variation pending, the game will return to normal game mode.

For this reason, in the sixth pachinko game machine, if 100 time-saving times are acquired on the first hit, or if a reserved special chart 2 change triggers a transition to a V jackpot game state and 100 time-saving times are acquired even if the time-saving times are only once, the possibility of winning a jackpot equal to the limiter number of times increases. Furthermore, even if a jackpot equal to the limiter number of times is acquired, if a special chart 2 is reserved, the mode will transition to pull-back mode. When the mode transitions to pull-back mode, the limiter number of times is reset to 3 or 7 times. And if a jackpot is acquired in pull-back mode by a special chart 2 jackpot, a small jackpot, or a V prize, the possibility of winning 100 time-saving times and winning another jackpot equal to the limiter number of times increases.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, after a jackpot, a further jackpot the limiter number of times is won, and then the machine transitions to a pull-back mode in which the normal game state is in effect and there is a special chart 2 reserved, and in this pull-back mode, a special chart 2 small jackpot is won and a V prize is won, allowing a player to win a further jackpot the limiter number of times in addition to the V jackpot, providing a gaming machine that can provide high excitement.

In addition, even if the player is unable to return to the jackpot state in the pull-back mode, if the special random number value is in the range of 51 to 100 and the player receives a jackpot, he or she can expect to receive the prize balls equivalent to eight jackpots, which will help maintain the player's motivation to continue playing.

Furthermore, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, when the special chart change is performed 750 times in the normal game state, the game machine transitions to the second time-saving game state (time-saving b). When the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) is activated, an instruction image encouraging the player to hit the right is displayed on the display device 2007, and the player can acquire the reserved special chart 2 by hitting the right. Here, if there is a reserved special chart 1 at the time of the 750th special chart change, the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) is activated at the time when the special chart 1 change due to the reserved special chart 1 starts, and if the change is a jackpot, the game machine transitions to the jackpot game state. If the special chart 2 change is acquired while the change is being performed, the special chart 2 change starts next. At this point, the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) ends, and the game machine transitions to the pull-back mode. In the pullback mode, if the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in a big win mode, or stops in a small win mode and transitions to a small win gaming state, and if a V is won in the small win gaming state, transitions to a V big win gaming state. After the big win gaming state ends, transitions to the first time-saving gaming state (time-saving a) with a time saving of "100 times". If the special symbol 2 reservation is gone, transitions to the normal gaming state.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko game machine, when the special pattern variation is performed 750 times in the normal game state, the player is given the opportunity to win a V jackpot. This allows the player to get a chance to win a V jackpot by repeating the number of special pattern variations even if the player is stuck and cannot win a jackpot in the normal game state. When the player wins a V jackpot, the player can win four jackpots until the limiter number of times is reached, providing a highly interesting game machine.
In addition, when the number of special pattern variations is 1 to 750, the limiter number may be set to 3, and after 751, the limiter number may be set to 7. This makes it possible to rescue players who have fallen into a deadlock.

In addition, when the limit number is three and when the limit number is seven, a part of the presentation displayed on the display device 2007 may be changed, for example, by changing the character displayed in the reach presentation. For example, as shown in FIG. 119(a), after a jackpot is won and the first jackpot game is completed, the display device 2007 may display "3 more" (FIG. 119(b)), and when the limit number is seven, a promotion presentation may be performed in which the display device 2007 displays "Not yet! 3 more" and when the limit number is seven, a promotion presentation may be performed.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the limiter count is determined by the special chart random number range, but the limiter count may be changed depending on the jackpot stopping mode of the special chart fluctuation in the low probability state.

In addition, during the first time-saving game state of 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state or during the jackpot game state, a presentation suggesting the number of times the limiter has been reached may be performed.
FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen after the end of the big win game state due to the first hit. A group of disks 2620 suggesting the limiter number is displayed on the display device 2007. FIG. 120(a) is an example of a presentation screen when the limiter number is "3", and three disks 2620 are displayed. Then, in the special chart change resulting in a big win, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a fighter plane 2630 is displayed on the display device 2007, and when an attack is made on the disk 2620, the game moves to the big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, as shown in FIG. 120(c), one is repelled and two disks 2620 are displayed. After that, the disks 2620 are reduced each time the game state moves to the big win game state, and as shown in FIG. 120(d), the game moves to the big win game state after the last disk 2620 is shot down, and after the big win game state ends, the game moves to the pull-back mode.

Figure 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen after the end of the big win game state due to the first hit. Figure 121 (a) is an example of a presentation screen when the limiter number is "7", and a total of three are displayed: two disks 2620 and one disk 2621 with a partially different design from the disk 2620. The disk 2621 is a character that will be shot down if attacked twice by the fighter plane 2630. Figure 121 (a) suggests that four big wins are guaranteed. Then, as shown in Figure 121 (b), when the disk 2620 is attacked, the game transitions to a big win game state, and after the big win game state ends, as shown in Figure 121 (c), the disk 2621 changes to the disk 2620, and two disks 2620 are displayed. In the first time-saving game state, as shown in Figure 121 (d), the disk 2621 or the disk 2620 may be reinforced. Figure 121(d) suggests that six jackpots are guaranteed.

In this way, when the limiter count is "7", by displaying disks 2621 and/or sending in reinforcements of disks 2621 and/or disks 2620, if fighter planes 2630 carry out a total of seven attacks, it will be displayed as if all disks 2621 and/or disks 2620 are shot down.

Even if the limiter count is "3", for example, one disk 2620 may be displayed first, and then disk 2621 may be displayed, or disk 2621 or disk 2620 may be added as reinforcements, so that when fighter plane 2630 attacks a total of three times, all disks 2621 or disks 2620 are shot down.

In addition, it is also possible to make the disk 2620 invincible so that it cannot be shot down, as shown in FIG. 121(e), or to combine an item 2622 with the disk 2620 to upgrade the disk 2620 to disk 2621, as shown in FIG. 121(f). Furthermore, by adding effects such as a fighter plane 2630 shooting down multiple disks 2620 in one attack, more diverse effects become possible, and for example, it is also possible to make an effect in which the limiter count initially appears to be "7", but in fact it is "3".

In addition, according to the sixth pachinko game machine described above, the end condition of the first time-saving game state is set when the number of times that the special symbol 1 changes is consumed once or 100 times, and the end condition of the second time-saving game state is set when the number of times that the special symbol 2 changes is consumed once, but the end condition of the time-saving game state may be set to a small win or the number of times that it is executed. In this case, the time-saving game state ends depending on whether a small win is won or the number of times that it is executed. Furthermore, the time-saving game state may end when a special small win pattern is won or when a special small win pattern is displayed.

[7-3. Variation 1 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine variant 1 will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine described above is a pachinko game machine called a type 1/type 2 mixed machine equipped with a limiter function and a b time-saving function, but the sixth pachinko game machine variant 1 is a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine equipped with a limiter function and a b time-saving function, like the first and second pachinko game machines. The game board unit of the sixth pachinko game machine variant 1 is the same as the game board unit 1010 of the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 45, so a detailed description will be omitted.

[7-3-1. Limiter count]
The limiter number of times in the first modification is the same as that of the sixth pachinko game machine described above, and the limiter number can be set to "3" or "7." Specifically, the limit is set to 3 times when the special chart jackpot determination random number value is in the range of 1 to 50 and a jackpot is obtained, the limit is set to 7 times when the special chart jackpot determination random number value is in the range of 51 to 100 and a jackpot is obtained when the special chart jackpot determination random number value is 101 or later and a limit is set to 3 times.

[7-3-2. Jackpot Probability]
In the first modification, the probability of the first and second special symbol drawings being judged as a big win is about 1/319 at low probability and about 1/94 at high probability. Note that the first and second special symbol drawings may also include cases where a small win is judged.

[7-3-3. Number of winning balls]
In variant example 1, the number of prize balls awarded for winning the large prize slot is "10," the number of prize balls awarded for winning the first and second start slots is "4," and the number of prize balls awarded for winning the general prize slot is "4."

[7-3-4. Jackpot count]
In the first modified example, the count number (maximum number of balls) in a round game in a big win gaming state is 9. When a small win is also included, the count number (maximum number of balls) in a small win gaming state is, for example, 10.

[7-3-5. Jackpot distribution]
In the case of a jackpot win in the special drawing 1 or jackpot win in the special drawing 2, the number of rounds will be selected as either "10 times" or "6 times" depending on the jackpot type of the special pattern.

［7-3-6. Chance distribution］
In the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving state), if a jackpot is won by the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery, there is a 10% chance of transitioning to a high probability state (probability variable state) and a 90% chance of transitioning to a low probability state (non-probability variable state). In the probability variable state or time-saving game state, if a jackpot is won by the special drawing 1 lottery or the special drawing 2 lottery, there is a 100% chance of transitioning to a high probability state (probability variable state).

[7-3-7. Time-saving allocation]
When a special chart 1 jackpot or special chart 2 jackpot is acquired from a normal game state, and the game state transitions to a high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot game state ends, the game state transitions to a first time-saving game state (time-saving a) and the number of time-saving times (for example, 10,000 times) until the next jackpot is set, and if the game state does not transition to a high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot game state ends, the game state transitions to a first time-saving game state (time-saving a) with 100 time-saving times. When a special chart 1 jackpot or special chart 2 jackpot is acquired in a probability change state or time-saving game state (first time-saving game state (time-saving a) or second time-saving game state (time-saving b)), the number of time-saving times (for example, 10,000 times) until the next jackpot is set, and if the game state transitions to a low probability state (non-probability change state) after the jackpot game state ends due to reaching the limiter number of times, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.
In addition, in the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving state), if a specified number of operations n (e.g., 750 times) is consumed without winning a jackpot in the special chart lottery, the game state will transition to a second time-saving game state (b time-saving) with, for example, 100 time-saving operations.

[7-3-8. Game Flow]
Next, the flow of the game using variant 1 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 122, in most cases, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the game is started from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal game state, the left hand is hit to advance the game with the aim of winning the first starting hole 1120. The first starting hole 1120 is used as a trigger to draw the special drawing 1, and if the special drawing 1 is won, the game state transitions to the big win game state. After the big win game state ends, if the game state transitions to the probability change state, the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) until the next big win. If the game state does not transition to the probability change state, the game state transitions to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 100 time-saving times. In the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the right hand is hit to advance the game with the aim of the game ball passing through the passing gate 1126. In the first time-saving gaming state (time-saving a), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the gaming ball through the passing gate 1126 becomes high, so that the normal electric device 1146 becomes more likely to operate.

When the first hit triggers a transition to the special state, it becomes possible to win a jackpot the number of times limited. Also, even if the first hit triggers a transition to the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) with 100 time-saving times, if a jackpot is won, it becomes possible to win a jackpot the number of times limited. Note that if a jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) with 100 time-saving times, the number of times limited will decrease by 1.

When the limit number of times is reached, the jackpot game state ends and the game transitions to a first time-saving game state (time-saving a) with 100 time reductions. If a jackpot is won in this first time-saving game state (time-saving a) with 100 time reductions, the limit number of times is reset, and after the jackpot game ends due to that jackpot, a new jackpot game can be won the number of times the limiter has been played. If a jackpot is not won within the 100 time reductions, the game transitions to the normal game state after the 100 time reductions have been used up. In this way, in variant 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine, the key is whether or not a jackpot can be won within the 100 time reductions after the limit number of times is reached.

In addition, after the limiter number of times is reached, during the 100 times of time reduction, if a jackpot is won between 1 and 50 times of special chart fluctuation, the limit may be set to 3 times, and if a jackpot is won between 51 and 100 times, the limit may be set to 7 times. In this case, by reducing the number of times of time reduction in the latter half, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, according to the sixth pachinko game machine, when the special chart changes 750 times in the normal game state, the machine transitions to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) where the time-saving count is 100 times. When the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is activated, an instruction image encouraging the player to hit the right is displayed on the display device 1007, and the player can acquire the reserved special chart 2 by hitting the right. As a result, just like in the case of the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) where the time-saving count is 100 times, if a jackpot is acquired in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), after the jackpot game due to the jackpot ends, the player can acquire a new jackpot game for the limiter count. If a jackpot is not acquired within the 100 time-saving times, the machine transitions to the normal game state after the 100 time-saving times are consumed.

In this way, even in the sixth pachinko game machine variant 1, by winning a jackpot in the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) with 100 times of time saving after the limiter number is reached, even more prize balls can be expected, and a game machine that can provide high interest can be provided. Moreover, even if a state in which a jackpot cannot be won continues for a long time, if the number of times of special pattern fluctuation reaches 750 times, it will move to the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) with 100 times of time saving, and if a jackpot is won in the second time-saving game state (time-saving b), it will be possible to expect prize balls for at least four jackpot games, making it possible to rescue a player who has become stuck.

As with the sixth pachinko game machine, in the first modified example, when the number of special chart variations is 1 to 750, the limiter number may be set to 3, and when the number of special chart variations is 751 or more, the limiter number may be set to 7. In addition, when the limiter number is set to 3 and when the limiter number is set to 7, a part of the presentation displayed on the display device 1007 may be changed, for example, by changing the character displayed in the reach presentation. In addition, after the first jackpot game ends, the display device 1007 may display "3 more" and when the limiter number is 7, a promotion presentation may be performed in which the display device 1007 displays "Not yet! 3 more" and when the limiter number is 7, a promotion presentation may be performed in which the display device 1007 displays "Not yet! 3 more" and when the limiter number is 7, a promotion presentation may be performed.

Also, like the sixth pachinko game machine, in variant 1, the limiter count is determined by a random number for determining a jackpot, but the limiter count may be changed depending on the jackpot stopping state of the special chart fluctuation in a low probability state.

[7-4. Modification 2 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, a description will be given of a modified example 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine. The modified example 2 has a limiter function, and is obtained by partially modifying the configuration of the game board unit in the modified example 1 and partially modifying the specifications regarding the big win and small win.

[7-4-1. Configuration of the game board unit]
Fig. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of a game board unit according to the modified example 2 of the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit according to the modified example 2 is obtained by newly arranging a small winning unit 1150 in the game board unit 1010 according to the second pachinko game machine shown in Fig. 45, and by changing the arrangement of the passing gate unit 1125 and the normal electric role unit 1145. In the modified example 2 shown in Fig. 123, the same members or members having the same functions as those in the game board unit 1010 according to the second pachinko game machine shown in Fig. 45 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The small winning unit 1150 is arranged in the upper part of the left side area 1106 as shown in FIG. 123. The small winning unit 1150 has the same configuration as the small winning unit 150 provided in the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4. In addition, the passing gate unit 1125B in the game board unit 1010 provided in the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 45 is arranged directly above the first starting hole 1120, and the game ball is configured to always pass through the passing gate 1126B before entering the first starting hole 1120. In addition, in the modified example 2, the passing gate unit 1125 is provided in the right side area 1107 as in the game board unit 1010 shown in FIG. 4. In the modified example 2, the passing gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107 is referred to as the passing gate unit 1125A, and the passing gate 1126 is referred to as the passing gate 1126A. In addition, a normal electric role unit 1145 is disposed below the first starting hole 1120. The normal electric role unit 1146 can capture the game ball whether it is hit from the left or right.

For this reason, if a small jackpot is won in the special chart 1 or special chart 2 lottery, it is possible to enter the small jackpot large prize winning hole 1151 by hitting from the left. Also, if a big jackpot is won in the special chart 1 or special chart 2 lottery, the jackpot will be entered in the big jackpot large prize winning hole 1131.

In addition, if a big win or small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, the ball may enter the big win opening 1151 for small wins, and if a big win or small win is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the ball may enter the big win opening 1131 for big wins. This makes it possible to progress the big win game or small win game by the special drawing 1 lottery by hitting from the left, and the big win game or small win game by the special drawing 2 lottery by hitting from the right. In the time-saving game state (first time-saving game state (a time-saving) and second time-saving game state (b time-saving)), it is easier to pass the game ball through the passing gate 1126A, so it is advantageous to progress by hitting from the right. In addition, it is also possible to hit from the right in the normal game state, pass the game ball through the passing gate 1126A, and aim to win the second starting opening 1140 by winning the normal drawing. However, in variant 2, special chart 2 changes are not reserved, and special chart 1 changes can be reserved up to four times, so players who hit from the left and aim to win at the first starting hole 1120 can change the special chart more often.

[7-4-2. Special Drawing 1, Special Drawing 2 reserved]
In the second modified example, the special chart 2 is changed in priority to the special chart 1. Also, as mentioned above, the special chart 2 change cannot be reserved, and the special chart 1 change can be reserved up to four times. In the normal game state, the variation pattern determination table is set so that the variation pattern of the special pattern 1 is about 10 seconds. Also, in the non-time-saving state, the variation time of the normal pattern is extremely short, and the normal electric role is The opening of 1146 is set to be somewhat long, for example, about 2 seconds. Here, when the special pattern 1 changes, it always passes through the passing gate 1126B, so if the normal pattern lottery is won, the normal power opens immediately. At this time, the special chart 1 has already changed. Even if you win the normal electric role 1146 that is opened while the special chart 1 is changing, the special chart 2 change will not be reserved, so the special chart 2 change cannot be made. In this way, in the normal game state, even if the normal electric device 1146 wins, the special chart 2 does not change, so the second starting hole 1140 becomes a base winning hole like the general winning hole.

[7-4-3. Small hit]
The special chart 1 lottery and the special chart 2 lottery include small wins. In particular, the special chart 2 lottery is set to make it easier to win a small win. The fluctuation pattern determination table for special chart 1 is selected to have a short fluctuation time pattern when a small win occurs. Specifically, since the fluctuation pattern for special chart 1 is about 10 seconds, a fluctuation pattern determination table is prepared in which a 1/10 fluctuation pattern is selected, and when a small win occurs, the fluctuation pattern determination table is switched to the 1/10 fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, the fluctuation pattern determination table is restored after the special chart 1 fluctuation.

As a result, for example, if a 1/10 change pattern is selected, by the time the normal symbol lottery is won and the normal electric device 1146 is entered, the special symbol 1 change may have ended, and the special symbol 2 may be able to change. Since the special symbol 2 lottery is more likely to result in a small win, the small win large prize opening 1151 opens and the game ball enters, allowing a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) to be won.

By changing the 1/10 fluctuation pattern determination table to a 1/8 or 1/6 fluctuation pattern determination table, it is possible to create states with base values of 50, 70, or 90. It is also possible to prepare a table that allows selection of 1/10, 1/8, or 1/6 time fluctuation patterns, and determine one of them by random number selection.

［7-4-4. Jackpot］
In the modified example 2, a two-round jackpot is installed, in which the time of the round game is relatively short. In the case of a two-round jackpot, as in the modified example 1, there is a 10% probability of transitioning to a high probability state (probability change state) and a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) until the next jackpot, and there is a 90% probability of transitioning to a low probability state (non-probability change state) and a first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with 100 time-savings.

[7-4-5. Production screen]
In the second modified example, the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) on the condition that the special symbol has been changed 750 times in the normal game state, and the time-saving b is activated when the special symbol changes for the 751st time. The stopping state of the identification pattern for the performance in the 751st special chart change, and the low probability state (non-probability state) and the 1st time-saving game state of 100 times ( The stopping pattern of the identification pattern for the special pattern change resulting in a two-round normal jackpot, which transitions to the special pattern change (a time reduction), will be the stopping pattern of a common special pattern.

Figure 124 is an example of a presentation executed in the special pattern change when entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) or the special pattern change resulting in a two-round normal jackpot, and the display device 1007 displays the first identification pattern 1601 for presentation and the first special pattern reservation information 1611 for presentation. When the first identification pattern 1601 for presentation related to the special pattern change when entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) or the special pattern change resulting in a two-round normal jackpot starts to change, as shown in Figure 124 (a), the first identification pattern 1601 for presentation becomes a reach state, and the reach presentation starts. Then, at the end of the reach presentation, as shown in Figure 124 (b), the first identification pattern 1601 for presentation temporarily stops in a miss state, and then, as shown in Figure 124 (c), all the first identification patterns 1601 for presentation change again, and as shown in Figure 124 (d), they stop in a special pattern of time-saving-time-saving. In addition, the first identification pattern 1601 for the time-saving effect will not be displayed except for the special pattern change when entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) and the special pattern change that results in a two-round normal jackpot.

According to variant 2 configured in this way, the special pattern change when entering the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) and the special pattern change when a two-round normal jackpot occurs will have a common stopping mode with a special pattern as the performance display, making it difficult to determine whether the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) or the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) has been entered.

In the above-mentioned modified example 2, the c time-saving function is not installed, but the c time-saving function may be installed. In this case, when the special pattern stop mode is a special mode that is a condition for the c time-saving operation, the stop mode of the first identification pattern 1601 for the performance may be stopped with a special pattern of "time-saving-time-saving".

[7-5. Modification 3 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, a description will be given of modified example 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. In modified example 3, multiple types of limiter counts can be set, similar to the sixth pachinko game machine, and the configuration of the game board unit 10 provided in the first pachinko game machine shown in Fig. 4 is partially changed, and the specifications regarding the big win and small win are partially changed.

[7-5-1. Configuration of the game board unit]
FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of a game board unit according to the modified example 3 of the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit according to the modified example 3 is a game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4, in which a rotating part 185 is newly arranged and another second start hole 140B is arranged in addition to the second start hole 140. The second start hole 140 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 will be referred to as the second start hole 140A. In the modified example 3 shown in FIG. 125, the same members or members having the same function as those in the game board unit 10 according to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 are given the same reference numerals and detailed description will be omitted.

Figure 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration and operation of the rotating part 185. The rotating part 185 is equipped with a disk 185a, a notch 185b, a rotating shaft 185c, and a rotary motor (not shown) that transmits rotation to the rotating shaft 185c to rotate the disk 185a at a constant speed. The disk 185a has a thickness slightly larger than a game ball, and has one notch 185b extending radially on its outer periphery. This notch 185b is large enough to accommodate one game ball. The rotating shaft of the disk 185a is erected at the center of the disk 185a, perpendicular to the surface of the board.

The rotating part 185 is positioned in front of the second starting hole 140B, which is positioned in the left area 106. At this time, the second starting hole 140B is positioned closer to the direction of rotation than the top of the rotating part 185. Therefore, the second starting hole 140B is hidden by the rotating part 185, but as the rotating part 185 rotates, the second starting hole 140B becomes visible through the notch 185b immediately after the notch 185b passes the top. Furthermore, two game nails are planted near the top of the rotating part 185 in the left area 106, spaced slightly larger than the game balls.

When the game ball passes between two game nails near the top of the rotating device 185 at the timing when the notch 185b passes the top, the game ball is contained in the notch 185b as shown in Fig. 126(a). In this state, the rotating device 185 rotates, and when the notch 185b reaches the second starting hole 140B as shown in Fig. 126(b), the game ball in the notch 185b moves to the second starting hole 140B, and the notch 185b becomes empty as shown in Fig. 126(c). If a game ball enters between two game nails near the top of the rotating device 185 before the notch 185b returns to the top again, the game ball will be maintained on the top of the rotating device 185 as shown in Figures 126(c) and 126(d), and when the notch 185b reaches the top, the game ball will be contained in the notch 185b as shown in Figure 126(a). By repeating this operation, the game ball will enter the second starting hole 140B at regular time intervals when hitting from the left.

[7-5-2. Special Chart 1, Special Chart 2 Changes]
In the modified example 3, the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 can be changed simultaneously. In the normal game state, the variation pattern determination table that determines the variation pattern of the special chart 2 determines a variation pattern of about 10 minutes of variation time, and the variation pattern determination table that determines the variation pattern of the special chart 1 determines a variation pattern of about 2 minutes of variation time at the longest.

[7-5-3. Small hit]
The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery include small wins. In particular, the special drawing 1 lottery is set to make it easier to win a small win. In addition, if a small win is won in the normal game state, the opening time of the small win large winning hole 151 in the small win game state is relatively short, so even if a small win is won when hitting from the left, the possibility of winning a prize ball is low.

[7-5-4. Others]
In the third modified example, the number of winning balls by winning the second starting hole 140B is set to "1". Therefore, even if game balls win the second starting hole 140B at a certain time interval during left-handed play, the number of balls held does not increase. Other specifications are generally the same as those of the sixth pachinko game machine, but if a small jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, the V attacker does not operate and V winning is not possible. In addition, the third modified example is equipped with a b time-saving function like the sixth pachinko game machine, and when the special chart fluctuation in the normal state, i.e., the low probability non-time-saving state, reaches a specified number of times n (for example, 750 times), the b time-saving function is activated and the state transitions to the second time-saving game state.

[7-5-5. Production screen]
The sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 calculates the total number of times the special symbols change in the low-probability non-time-saving game state (the sum of the number of times the special symbols 1 change and the number of times the special symbols 2 change) based on a command sent from the main control circuit 200. ), the number of times the special pattern 1 changes, and the number of times the display changes, which is the number of times the special pattern is displayed on the display device 7, are controlled. The number of times the display changes is added to the number of times the special pattern 1 changes. The number of times is the cumulative sum of the number of times, and the added number of times is appropriately determined from a number equal to or less than the difference between the total number of times of change and the number of times of display change.

Figure 127 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 7 in variant 3 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 127 (a) shows an example of a presentation screen displayed on the display device 7 at the start of the normal state, i.e., the low probability non-time shortening state, and various presentation images including a special chart 1 identification pattern 601 for presentation, special chart 1 reserved information 611, and change count information 621 that displays the number of display changes are displayed on the display device 7. In the normal state, since it is possible to win in the first starting port 120A and the second starting port 140, a special chart 1 change or a special chart 2 change is performed in the first special pattern display unit 163 or the second special pattern display unit 164. On the other hand, the display device 7 displays a special chart 1 identification pattern 4601 for presentation corresponding to the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display unit 4163, but does not display the special pattern for presentation and reserved information corresponding to the second special pattern displayed by the second special pattern display unit 4164.

As shown in FIG. 127(a), the fluctuation count information 621 is displayed as "0" at the start of the normal state, i.e., the low probability non-time-saving state, and when the fluctuation stops, it is displayed as "1" as shown in FIG. 127(b). At this time, if special chart 1 and special chart 2 are fluctuating at the same time and the result of the special chart 1 lottery is a small win, special chart 2 will also stop, so the total number of fluctuations will be "2", and if the result of the special chart 1 lottery is a miss, special chart 2 will not stop, so the total number of fluctuations will be "1".

In the third modified example, when a small win occurs after the reach performance, the number of times displayed in the change count information 621 is added. In the initial state, the change count information 621 displays the number of changes of the special chart 1, and the number of times added is cumulatively added each time a small win occurs after the reach performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 127(c), the change count information 621 displays "200", but the total number of changes is "300". In this state, when a reach is applied as shown in FIG. 127(d), and after the reach performance, the special chart 1 identification pattern 601 for the performance stops as shown in FIG. 127(e), the change count information 621 changes to "201". Here, when the game transitions to a small win game state, the sub-CPU 301 determines the number of times added within the range of the difference between the total number of changes "300" and the number of changes "200" displayed as the change count information 621, that is, within the range of 0 to 100. For example, if 50 times is determined, "+50" is displayed as shown in FIG. 127(e), and the change count information 621 changes to "251" as shown in FIG. 127(f).

According to variant example 3 configured in this manner, when hitting from the left, the game ball enters the second starting hole 140B at regular time intervals, which increases the opportunities for simultaneous special chart 1 variation and special chart 2 variation. If a small jackpot is won with special chart 1 variation, special chart 2 variation is also forcibly stopped, which makes it possible to quickly consume the n number of special chart variations until the b time reduction is activated.
In addition, when a small win occurs after the reach effect, a predetermined number is added to the number of times the fluctuation count information 621 is displayed, which increases interest in the reach effect and gives the impression that the player is approaching the b time reduction.

[7-6. Variation 4 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine variant 4 will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine variant 4 is configured to enter a small win RUSH state when the b time-saving function is activated in the sixth pachinko game machine variant 1. In addition, the game board unit 10 related to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 can be applied to the sixth pachinko game machine variant 4.

[7-6-1. Jackpot Probability]
In the fourth modification, the probability of a big win being determined in the first and second special symbol drawings is about 1/319 at low probability and about 1/94 at high probability. The probability of a small win being determined in the first special symbol drawing is 0, and the low probability of a small win being determined in the second special symbol drawing is, for example, 1/10 and the high probability is 0.

[7-6-2. Time-saving game state]
The winning probability of the regular drawing lottery in the first time-shortened game state (a time-shortened game state) is higher than the winning probability of the regular drawing lottery in the normal game state, but the winning probability of the regular drawing lottery in the second time-shortened game state (b time-shortened game state) is the same as the winning probability of the regular drawing lottery in the normal game state.

The opening time of the normal electric device when a normal prize is won in the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) is longer than the opening time of the normal electric device when a normal prize is won in the normal game state, but the opening time of the normal electric device when a normal prize is won in the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) is the same as the opening time of the normal electric device when a normal prize is won in the normal game state.

The normal map fluctuation time in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) and the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is set shorter than the normal map fluctuation time in the normal game state. Also, the normal map fluctuation time in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is set significantly shorter than the normal map fluctuation time in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving).

According to the modified example 4 configured in this way, when the ceiling is reached (the number of times the special chart changes reaches the number of times n that it has been activated) and the b time reduction in the non-winning state (without the opening extension function) is activated, the opening time of the normal electric device 146 is not extended, so that the game balls that have not been captured by the normal electric device 146 flow into the small win large winning opening 151, making it possible for the game balls to win in the small win large winning opening 151 in the small win game state. Moreover, since the normal chart changes are consumed at high speed, the time until a small win is won is shortened, so it is possible to frequently transition to the small win game state and win prize balls. In this way, when the b time reduction is activated, the so-called small win RUSH is triggered.

[7-7. Modification 5 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine variant 5 will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine variant 5 is a variation of the sixth pachinko game machine variant 1, in which when the b time-saving function is activated, the probability of winning the normal prize is slightly different from that in the normal game state, and the operation of the normal electric role is almost unchanged, that is, a so-called micro-time-saving is installed. Also, in the sixth pachinko game machine variant 4, the game board unit 3010 related to the fourth pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 81 can be applied.

[7-7-1. Specifications of Modified Example 5]
In the specification of the modified example 5, the probability of the first special symbol drawing being a big win is about 1/99 in a low probability state and about 1/66 in a high probability state. The probability of the first special symbol drawing being a small win is 0. The probability of the second special symbol drawing being a big win is 1/99 in a low probability state and about 1/66 in a high probability state. The probability of the second special symbol drawing being a small win is about 97/99 in a low probability state and about 67/69 in a high probability state.
In the normal game state, the probability that the special chart 1 and special chart 2 jackpots are probability jackpots is 50%, and the probability that they are normal jackpots is 50%. In the high probability state, the probability that the special chart 1 jackpot is probability jackpots is 100%, and the probability that it is normal jackpots is 0%.
The probability of winning in the regular drawing is, for example, 10/256 in the normal game state and 255/256 in the first time-saving game state (time-saving a).

The number of times the special probability increases and the number of times the time is reduced in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) are both 90 times, and if the special chart fluctuation reaches 90 times after the end of a jackpot game, if the state is in a high probability state, it will transition to a low probability state, and the state will transition from the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) to the normal game state.

In the fifth modified example, the b time-saving function is provided, and the number of times n of operation for entering the b time-saving function is set to a relatively small number, for example, 90 times. The number of times N of time-saving can be set appropriately, but is set to, for example, 10 times. The probability of winning by the normal drawing in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is, for example, 11/256 in the normal game state. Here, according to the sixth modified example 5 of the pachinko game machine, as in the fourth pachinko game machine, in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), when the normal electric role 3146 captures the game ball by the so-called electric chute support, the first non-electric role 3441 opens, making it easier to win the first start hole 3120, and it is difficult to win the second start hole 3140. In the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), when the normal electric device 3146 captures the game ball by the electric chute support, the second non-electric device 3441 opens, making it easier for the ball to enter the second starting hole 3140, but difficult for the ball to enter the first starting hole 3120.

In addition, if a player wins a jackpot in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the system is set to be more advantageous for the player than if the player wins a jackpot in the special chart 1 lottery in the normal game state. If a player wins a normal jackpot or a special jackpot in the normal game state, 90 time-saving cycles are granted, but if a player wins a jackpot in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), the time-saving cycle is granted until the next jackpot (10,000 time-saving cycles).

Next, the flow of the game using variant 5 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 128, in most cases, in the sixth modified example 5 of the pachinko game machine, the game starts from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal game state, the player plays the game by hitting the left hand side, aiming to win the first starting hole 3120. When the first starting hole 3120 wins, a special drawing 1 lottery is held, and if the special drawing 1 lottery is won, the game moves to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game state ends, in the case of a jackpot, the game moves to a high probability time-saving game state (a time-saving) in which the number of times of the special drawing and the number of time-saving are 90 times. If the game does not move to the special drawing state, the game moves to a low probability time-saving game state (a time-saving) in which the number of time-saving is 90 times.

After the jackpot game state ends, in the first time-saving game state of 90 times, if a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, the game will transition to another jackpot game state. At this time, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in a high probability state. In the case of a normal jackpot, the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in a low probability state. Also, if the number of loops between the high probability state and the jackpot game state reaches a specified number (limiter number) after the jackpot game state ends when the specified number (limiter number) is reached, the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in a low probability state. Note that the number of loops is reset when the game transitions to the low probability state.

When the number of time-saving times (90 times) in the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) is consumed, the next special chart change will cause the game to transition to the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) where the number of time-saving times is 10 times for special chart 2. If a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery in the second time-saving game state (time-saving b), the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (time-saving a) where the number of time-saving times is 10,000. When the number of time-saving times 10 times is consumed in the second time-saving game state (time-saving b), the game will transition to the normal game state, which is a low-probability non-time-saving state.
In addition, the number of activations n to enter the b time-saving mode, the number of time-saving times N, and the advantage to the player when winning a jackpot in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving mode) are not limited to those described above and can be set as appropriate.

According to variant 5 configured in this way, if a jackpot is won during the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), even if a normal jackpot is won, time saving is provided until the next jackpot (10,000 time-savings), making it possible to increase interest in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving).

Modification 5 is not limited to the above, and may be modified to give a larger bonus to a player depending on the number of times the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is acquired before winning a jackpot in a low probability state. For example, it may be applied to the specifications of Modification 1 of the sixth pachinko game machine, so that the more times the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is acquired before winning a jackpot in a low probability state, the larger the limiter number can be selected. In addition, in the above-mentioned Modification 5, the number of times of fluctuation in the high probability state is also included in the number of operations n for activating the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), but it is also possible to transition to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) when the special chart fluctuation is performed the number of times n (90 times) after transitioning from the high probability state to the low probability state without including the number of fluctuations in the high probability state. This makes it possible to stimulate the player's desire to continue playing, rather than ending the game immediately after the end of the jackpot game, and to change the special chart only 90 more times.

In addition, the above-mentioned modified example 5 has been described as an example in which the game board unit 3010 relating to the fourth pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 81 is applied, but other game board units may be used. For example, in the game board unit 3010 relating to the fourth pachinko game machine, the first operating mechanism 3511 and the second operating mechanism 3512, the first non-electric role 3440 and the first non-electric role 3440 may be deleted, and the game balls sorted by the sorting device 3506 may directly enter the first start hole 3120 and the second start hole 3140. Furthermore, in the game board unit 1010 relating to the second pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 45, a second first start hole 1120 may be provided instead of the second start hole 1140, that is, it is also applicable to a game in which only the special drawing 1 is performed. However, in this case, if a jackpot is won in the normal game mode or the first time-saving game mode (a time-saving), 90 times of time saving will be granted after the jackpot state ends, and if a jackpot is won in the second time-saving game mode (b time-saving), 10,000 times of time saving will be granted after the jackpot state ends.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned variant 5, when the number of loops reaches a specified number (limiter number), a transition to a low-probability time-saving game state occurs after the jackpot game state in which the specified number of loops (limiter number) has been reached ends, but this is not limited to this, and a transition to a low-probability non-time-saving game state may also be possible. The number of loops may also be the number of loops between the time-saving game state and the jackpot game state.

[7-8. Variation 6 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the sixth modified pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth modified pachinko game machine is a modified pachinko game machine in which the content of the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is switched depending on the stop pattern of the special symbol at the time of the number of operations n, which is the condition for entering the b time-saving state, in the sixth modified pachinko game machine. In addition, the sixth modified pachinko game machine can be applied to the game board unit 10 of the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4.

[7-8-1. Specifications of Modification 6]
The specifications of the modified example 6 are substantially the same as those described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The probability of winning by the normal drawing is, for example, 50/256 in the normal game state and 255/256 in the first time-saving game state (time-saving a).

Furthermore, the content of the second time-saving game state (time-saving b) is determined based on the random number value obtained in the random number lottery for determining the stopping pattern of the special chart when the number of activations is n.

Figure 129 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth modified pachinko game machine. As shown in Figure 129, in many cases in the sixth modified pachinko game machine, the game starts from the normal game state at the beginning of the game. In the normal game state, the player plays the game by hitting the left side and aiming for the winning of the first starting hole 120. The winning of the first starting hole 120 triggers a special drawing 1 lottery, and if the special drawing 1 lottery is won, the game state transitions to the jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot game state ends, in the case of a sure-win jackpot, the game state transitions to a high probability state and the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with the time-saving count of 0 or 10,000 times. In other words, the game state transitions to a potential probability state or a sure-win state with electric chute support. In the case of a normal jackpot, the game state transitions to a low probability state and the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with the time-saving count of 50 times.

After the jackpot game state ends, the first time-saving game state will transition to another jackpot game state in which a jackpot is won in the special drawing. At this time, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in a high probability state. In the case of a normal jackpot, the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in a low probability state. Also, after the jackpot game state ends due to a guaranteed jackpot, if the number of loops between the high probability state and the jackpot game state reaches a specified number (limiter number), the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) in a low probability state after the jackpot game state that has reached the specified number (limiter number) ends. When transitioning to the low probability state, the number of loops is reset. Note that the game may transition to a normal game state (low probability non-time-saving state) after the jackpot game state that has reached the specified number (limiter number) ends.

When the low probability state occurs and the number of time-saving times (50 times) in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is consumed, the game state is shifted to a normal game state.
When the number of special pattern changes in the low probability state reaches 750 times, the next special pattern change will cause a transition to the second time-saving game state (b time-saving). The winning probability of the regular pattern lottery in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) and the change time are determined by the stopping mode due to the 750th special pattern change.

Specifically, when the stop pattern of the special pattern is a miss pattern, the group is divided into miss 1 and miss 2 based on the random number value. In the case of miss 1, the micro time reduction 1 (for example, the winning probability by the normal pattern lottery is 51/256) is set. In the case of miss 2, the micro time reduction 2 (for example, the winning probability by the normal pattern lottery is 52/256) is set. In addition, when the stop pattern of the special pattern is a miss pattern, the group is divided into miss 1 and miss 2 based on the random number value. In the case of miss 1, the micro time reduction 1 (for example, the winning probability by the normal pattern lottery is 11/256) is set. In the case of miss 2, the micro time reduction 2 (for example, the winning probability by the normal pattern lottery is 12/256) is set. For example, the number of time reductions N is set to 20 times.
When the special symbol stops in a small win mode, it is grouped into small win 1 and small win 2 based on a random number value. In the case of small win 1, the time reduction is set to 100 times, and in the case of small win 2, the time reduction is set to 200 times. The probability of winning by the normal symbol lottery remains the same as in the normal game state, but the normal symbol fluctuation time is switched to a short-time fluctuation pattern.
Then, in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving), if the special pattern changes a specified number of times, the game state transitions to the normal game state.

According to variant 6 configured in this way, the degree of advantage to the player in the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) is determined according to the stopping pattern of the special symbol at the time of activation number n, which will cause the game to enter the second time-saving game state (b time-saving). This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the stopping pattern of the special symbol at the time of activation number n.

[7-9. Modification 7 of the 6th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine variant 7 will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine variant 7 relates to a pachinko game machine equipped with a b time-saving function. In the sixth pachinko game machine variant 7, the game board unit 10 relating to the first pachinko game machine shown in FIG. 4 can be applied. Generally, in a pachinko game machine, the normal game state (low probability non-time-saving state) is the basic state, but in the variant 7, the latent probability change state (high probability non-time-saving state) is the basic state.

For example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing is set relatively high, the percentage of winning a special jackpot in the special drawing is set high (for example, 97%), and the percentage of transitioning to the first time-saving play state (time-saving a) in the case of a special jackpot is lowered, thereby increasing the percentage of transitioning to a latent special jackpot (non-time-saving special jackpot) state. In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot play ends, the player transitions to a low probability state (non-special jackpot state) and the first time-saving play state (time-saving a). When the player transitions to the first time-saving play state (time-saving a), N time-saving plays are awarded.

In addition, when the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is entered, there is a high probability that the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) will continue after the jackpot game ends. If a normal jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game ends. If a special jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the game will transition to either M STs or a high probability non-time-saving game state without time-saving after the jackpot game ends. When transitioning to M STs, the game will simultaneously transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) with M+N time-savings. In other words, if a special jackpot is won in the first time-saving game state (a time-saving), the game will transition to the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) after the jackpot game ends, and the first M times will be in a high probability state, and the N times after the ST end will be in a high probability state. In addition, the number of balls that can be obtained when the game is switched from the time-saving game state to the jackpot game state is significantly greater than the number of balls that can be obtained when the game is switched from the non-time-saving game state to the jackpot game state. In this way, according to the seventh modification, the low-probability time-saving game state (low-probability time-saving game state) is more advantageous to the player than the high-probability non-time-saving game state without time-saving. In addition, the seventh modification of the sixth pachinko game machine is equipped with a limiter function. For example, when the number of loops between the jackpot and the high-probability non-time-saving game state is 15 times (limiter number 15 times), the game is switched to the normal game state, and when the number of loops between the jackpot and the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) is 5 times (limiter number 5 times), the game is switched to the normal game state. The limiter number is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate.

Next, the flow of the game will be explained. Figure 130 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the game state in the modified example 7 of the sixth pachinko game machine. Immediately after the opening of the hall, the game is in the normal game state, but after the game starts, the probability of winning a jackpot is high and most of them will transition to the latent probability change state, so the basic state will be the latent probability change state (high probability non-time shortening state). When a normal jackpot is won and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (time shortening a), the count of the number of operations n, which is the activation condition of the time-saving function b, begins. Here, the number of operations n is set to be the same as or larger than the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving game state (time shortening a) N times. For this reason, if the number of operations n is the number of time-saving times (N times) in the first time-saving game state (time shortening a), when the first time-saving game state (time shortening a) ends, the time-saving function b will be activated from the next special chart change, and the game will transition to the second time-saving game state, and as a result, the number of time-saving times will be further increased. If you move to ST after a jackpot game ends, the number of times n the game is activated is not counted when the time-saving count is M times, which is the high probability state, but then when you move to a low probability state and N times the time-saving count is consumed, the number of times n the game is activated is counted. Therefore, when ST ends, the b time-saving function is activated from the next special pattern change, and you move to a second time-saving game state, and as a result the number of time-saving counts is further increased. If you move to a high probability non-time-saving game state after a jackpot game ends, no time-saving is granted, so you will play normally, aiming for a jackpot.

In this way, according to variant 7, the low probability time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player than the guaranteed bonus state without time-saving, and since the second time-saving game state (b time-saving) can be activated after the first time-saving game state (a time-saving) has ended, it is possible to provide the player with a new interest in that the time-saving can be easily continued.

In addition to winning a regular jackpot, the game will also transition to a low probability state if the RAM is cleared, ST is skipped, etc. In this case, the game will also start counting the number of times n that the b time-saving function is activated. For this reason, the b time-saving function will be activated when the special chart fluctuation of the number of times n is consumed immediately after the hall opens, making it possible to include a so-called morning function. The game will also transition to a low probability state if the limiter number of times is reached.

According to the sixth pachinko gaming machine and its modified examples described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a new advantageous state by having multiple types of limiter counts and providing cases where the limiter count is high and low. In addition, according to the sixth pachinko gaming machine and its modified examples, by installing b time reduction, which can be said to be a ceiling time reduction, it is possible to differentiate between the awarding of balls after the ceiling is reached and the awarding of balls before the ceiling is reached, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. Here, the number of time reductions may be more for jackpots after the ceiling is reached than for jackpots before the ceiling is reached (b time reduction). This makes it possible to increase the expected total number of balls that can be acquired after the ceiling is reached. Note that modified examples 1 to 7 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine may be gaming machines that do not have a limiter function.

The above describes an embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to the above, and in particular in models equipped with b time reduction, the following functions may be provided.
When a general pre-reading effect lottery which anticipates a normal jackpot and a predictive effect which suggests a ceiling time reduction overlap, the predictive effect of the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) may be displayed preferentially.
In addition, the time after the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) may be measured and displayed.
Also, when the number of remaining spins until the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) is reached is close, a function may be provided to notify the player that the ceiling time reduction is close when the player tries to leave the machine. For example, a sensor may be provided to detect the player, and the player may be notified when the touch on the launch handle does not occur for a certain period of time and the demo screen is displayed. Specifically, when the number of remaining spins until the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) is reached is close, a function may be provided to display "sit" during the demo, or to display "sit" during the demo and also suggest the setting.

The following describes the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine described above and the effects that result from that configuration.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and variably displays a pattern based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating a specific result, the gaming machine is controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, there is a gaming machine that has advantageous gaming states including a big win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a big win, and a small win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a small win and is less profitable for the player than the big win gaming state.

In recent years, gaming machines of this type have been introduced that are equipped with a favorable gaming state in which the time for which the above-mentioned symbols are displayed is shortened (time-saving state), and a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby granting the player a predetermined benefit (for example, JP 2019-076136 A).

However, there is also a demand for greater entertainment value in gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming state functions.

The gaming machine described below aims to solve these problems and provide a gaming machine equipped with highly interesting and advantageous gaming functions.

(1) a game board having a game area in which a game medium can roll;
A first starting area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A second starting area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state advantageous to a player occurs when a game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area;
A symbol information display means for notifying a result of the determination by the special game state transition determination means by changing and stopping the symbol information;
A passage area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
a displacement member that is displaceable between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium;
a displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member from the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the passage area;
a specific identification information display means for notifying a result of the determination by the displacement determination means by changing or stopping the specific identification information;
A game state control means for controlling a game state;
Equipped with
the special gaming state includes a first gaming state in which a predetermined game that can provide a player with an advantage can be executed, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined game can be executed repeatedly a plurality of times;
The game state control means includes:
when the stop display mode of the identification information displayed when the judgment result of the special game state transition judgment means judges that the transition to the second game state is not to be made is a special mode, transitioning to a special time-saving state in which a displacement pattern that takes a long time to judge that the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state is easier to select than in a normal state;
After transitioning to the special time-saving state, when the number of changes in the identification information reaches a specified number of times, the special time-saving state is terminated,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the normal state, the variation of the identification information triggered by the passage of the gaming medium into the second starting area is stopped, and the first gaming state is executed.

According to (1), when the stop display mode of the identification information becomes a special mode, a transition to a special time-saving game is made, and in the special time-saving game (time-saving b, time-saving c), when the displacement determination means (regular pattern lottery) determines that the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state, the displacement member (regular electric device) becomes the first state (open state), and the displacement member (regular electric device) captures the game medium (game ball) in the special time-saving state, triggering the start of fluctuation of the identification information and transition from the special time-saving state to the normal state. If the transition to the first game state is selected due to the fluctuation of the identification information, the first game state is transitioned to, and further, if the stop mode at this time is a special mode, the special time-saving game is transitioned to after the first game state ends. As a result, a loop of the first game state is formed by alternating between the special time-saving game and the normal state, and the first game state can be continued. In this way, it becomes possible to realize an advantageous gaming state triggered by the special time-saving state, which can further increase the interest of the player.

(2) In (1), when the stop display mode of the identification information is a special mode, the game is shifted to the first game state, and after the first game state ends, the game is shifted to the special time-saving state in which the identification information is changed a specific number of times in response to the passing of the game ball into the second starting area a specified number of times;
A gaming machine characterized in that the special time-saving state ends when the identification information begins to change the specified number of times.

(3) In the above (1) or (2), when a game medium passes through the first starting area or the second starting area while the identification information is changing, a holding means is provided for holding the change of the identification information,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, after the first gaming state is ended when the stop display mode of the identification information display means becomes the special mode, if a change due to the game medium passing through the second starting area is pending, the gaming state control means ends the special time-saving state simultaneously with the start of a change in the identification information based on the pending change.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3), the special time-saving state is ended when the hold means does not hold a change in the identification information caused by the gaming medium passing through the second start area after the first gaming state ends when the stop display mode of the identification information display means becomes the special mode.

(5) In (1) to (4), the game state control means transitions the game state after the end of the second game state to either the normal state in which the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member will be switched to the first state with a predetermined probability, or a time-saving state in which the displacement determination means is likely to determine that the displacement member in the second state will be switched to the first state with a long displacement time,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the benefits given to the player differ between the time-saving state and the special time-saving state.

(6) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (5), the displacement member is capable of capturing a plurality of gaming media, is capable of maintaining a first state until the plurality of gaming media are captured, and is displaced to a second state when the plurality of gaming media are captured.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (6), the time when the identification information changes due to the passage of the gaming medium through the second start area is a short time, and the identification information during the change has a high probability of changing to the special stop display mode.

(8) In the above (5), a launching means for launching a game medium toward the game area;
and a notification means for notifying various information.
The game area has a first area and a second area in which game media can be shot separately by a player operating the launching means,
The first region has the first initiation region,
The second region has the passing region and the displacement member,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means performs a presentation to encourage the player to fire the gaming medium into the second area during the time-saving state and the special time-saving state, and performs a suggestion presentation to encourage the player to fire the gaming medium into the first area between the start and stop of the change in the identification information, which marks the end of the time-saving state and the special time-saving state.

(9) In (3) or (4), a gaming machine characterized in that, when the stop display mode after the identification information has changed a specified number of times in the special time-saving state based on the final reservation in the reservation means is a mode in which the identification information changes to the second gaming state and then changes to the normal state after the second gaming state ends, the gaming machine transitions to the normal state when the stop display mode is a mode in which the identification information changes to the second gaming state and then changes to the normal state after the second gaming state ends, or when the stop display mode is a mode in which the identification information does not change to the special gaming state other than the special mode.

(10) In any one of (1) to (9), the displacement member is displaced to the second state when two game media are captured in the first state.

(11) A gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10), characterized in that the probability of transitioning to the first gaming state in the normal state in response to the passage of a gaming medium into the second starting area and transitioning to the special time-saving state after the end of the first gaming state is higher than the probability of transitioning to the first gaming state in response to the passage of a gaming medium into the second starting area in the special time-saving state and transitioning to the special time-saving state after the end of the first gaming state.

(12) In any one of (1) to (11), the game state control means transitions the game state to the special time-saving state when the identification information reaches a predetermined number of fluctuations.

The above gaming machine makes it possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a highly entertaining and advantageous gaming state function.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and variably displays a pattern based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating a specific result, the gaming machine is controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, there is a gaming machine that has advantageous gaming states including a big win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a big win, and a small win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a small win and is less profitable for the player than the big win gaming state.

In recent years, gaming machines of this type have been introduced that are equipped with a favorable gaming state in which the time for which the above-mentioned symbols are displayed is shortened (time-saving state), and a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby granting the player a certain benefit (for example, JP 2019-076136 A).

However, there is also a demand for greater entertainment value in gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming state functions.

The gaming machine described below aims to solve these problems and equip highly-interested players with a function that transitions to an advantageous gaming state.

(1) a game board having a game area in which a game medium can roll;
A selection area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A first starting area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A second starting area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state advantageous to a player occurs when a game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area;
A symbol information display means for notifying a result of the determination by the special game state transition determination means by changing and stopping the symbol information;
a game state control means for switching a game state according to a stop display mode of the identification information display means;
A passage area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
a displacement member that is displaceable between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium;
a displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member from the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the passage area;
A specific passing area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass.
the selection area allows the game medium that has passed through the specific passing area to pass through any one of a plurality of areas through which the game medium can pass, including the first starting area and the passing area;
the special gaming state includes a first gaming state in which a predetermined game that can provide a player with an advantage can be executed, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined game can be executed repeatedly a plurality of times;
the special game state transition determination means is more likely to determine that a transition to the first game state will occur upon the game medium passing through the second starting area than to determine that a transition to the first game state will occur upon the game medium passing through the first starting area;
The second starting area allows the game medium to pass through when the displacement member captures the game ball,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member should be displaced to a first state, the displacement member operates in a displacement pattern in which the displacement member repeats the first state and the second state multiple times before becoming the second state, and while operating in the displacement pattern, the displacement member is capable of capturing approximately the same number of gaming media as the multiple times.

According to (1), in the normal state, when the game ball moves to a specific area (Kloon plate) and passes through the passing area, and the displacement determination means (regular drawing) determines to displace the displacement member (regular electric device) to the first state, the displacement member operates in a long displacement pattern in which the displacement member repeats the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state) multiple times (e.g., 10 times) before becoming the second state. The displacement member captures the game medium multiple times (e.g., 10 times) in the first state (open state), which causes the game medium to pass through the second starting area, and therefore the first game state can be obtained at least as many times as the game medium has passed through the second starting area. In this way, in addition to the transition to a special game state (first bonus) by the game ball moving to a specific area (Krun plate) and passing through the first starting area, a new game feature can be provided in which the game ball can move to a specific area (Krun plate) and pass through the passing area to transition to the first game state multiple times in succession while the displacement member is operating in a long displacement pattern (second bonus). In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a function for transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to highly interesting players.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1), when the displacement member transitions to the first gaming state in response to capturing a gaming medium while operating in the displacement pattern, the first gaming state is executed while the displacement member is in the second state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2), the selection area includes the first start area, the passing area, and a discharge area that guides the gaming medium to a path that discharges the gaming medium outside the gaming board.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (3), the gaming machine is capable of shifting between a first state in which it is easy to capture a gaming medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture a gaming medium, and is characterized in that it further comprises a specific shifting member that shifts the gaming machine to the second state when a specified number of gaming media are captured in the first state, and that leads the captured gaming media to the second starting area.

(5) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (4), when the special game state transition determination means determines that the game state will transition to the second game state while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, the game state transition is made to the second game state regardless of the operating state of the displacement member.

(6) In any one of (1) to (5), when the game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area while the identification information display means is variably displaying the identification information, a reservation means is further provided for reserving a predetermined number of the variable display of the identification information,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the special game state transition determination means determines that the transition to the second game state will occur while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, the variable display of the identification information reserved in the retention means is not executed in the second game state, but is executed after the second game state ends.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (6), a larger benefit is given to a player when the special game state transition determination means determines that the game state will transition to the first game state based on the passage of all game media through the second start area while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern, compared to when the special game state transition determination means determines that the game state will transition to the second game state while the displacement member is operating in the displacement pattern.

(8) In any one of (1) to (7), the game state control means
a game state after the end of the special game state is transitioned to either a normal state in which the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member will be switched to the first state with a predetermined probability, or a time-saving state in which it is easy to determine that the displacement member will be switched to the first state with a long displacement time in which it is determined that the displacement member in the second state will be displaced to the first state;
The gaming machine, characterized in that the displacement member operates in the displacement pattern when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state in the normal state.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8), the displacement member is characterized in that, when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state in the time-saving state, the opening time of the displacement member is longer than the time for which the displacement member is to be in the first state in the displacement pattern when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state in the normal state, and the displacement member operates in a pattern in which the displacement member is to be in the first state once.

(10) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (9), the total profit given to the player by the displacement member moving in the displacement pattern and the profit given to the player by the transition to the first gaming state as determined by the special gaming state transition determination means based on the passage of all gaming media through the second starting area while the displacement member is moving in the displacement pattern is greater than the profit given by entering the second gaming state.

The present invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a gaming state function that is advantageous for highly-interested players.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and variably displays a pattern based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating a specific result, the gaming machine is controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, there is a gaming machine that has advantageous gaming states including a big win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a big win, and a small win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a small win and is less profitable for the player than the big win gaming state.

In recent years, gaming machines of this type have been introduced that are equipped with a favorable gaming state in which the time for which the above-mentioned symbols are displayed is shortened (time-saving state), and a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby granting the player a predetermined benefit (for example, JP 2019-76136 A).

However, there is also a demand for greater entertainment value in gaming machines that offer advantageous gaming states.

The purpose of the gaming machine described below is to solve these problems and provide a gaming machine that can give players new interest in favorable gaming conditions.

(1) a game board having a game area in which a game medium can roll;
A first starting area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A second starting area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state advantageous to a player occurs when a game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area;
a first identification information display means for notifying a result of the determination made by the special game state transition determination means when the game medium passes through the first starting area by changing and stopping a first identification information;
A second identification information display means for notifying a result of the determination made by the special game state transition determination means triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area by changing and stopping the second identification information;
A passage area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
a displacement member that is displaceable between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, and that guides the captured game medium to the second starting area;
a displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member from the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the passage area;
a specific identification information display means for notifying a result of the determination by the displacement determination means by changing or stopping the specific identification information;
A game state control means for switching the game state;
Equipped with
The stop display mode of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is determined when the special game state transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state, includes a probability win mode in which the game state is transitioned to a probability win mode in which the special game state transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state after the special game state ends, and a normal win mode in which the game state is transitioned to a non-probability win mode in which the special game state transition determination means determines that the game state will be transitioned to the special game state after the special game state ends,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special win mode and the normal win mode include a stop mode in which, after the special game state ends, the game transitions to a time-saving state in which it is easy to determine that the displacement member in the second state will be switched to the first state over a long displacement time during which the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member in the second state will be switched to the first state, and a stop mode in which the game transitions to a non-time-saving state in which it is difficult to determine that the displacement member in the second state will be switched to the first state over a long displacement time during which the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member in the second state will be switched to the first state.

(2) In (1), a performance display means for performing various performance displays;
A performance control means for controlling the performance display means to execute various performance displays,
When the first identification information is a stop mode in which the special game state transition determination means has determined that a transition to the special game state will occur, after the special game state ends, a transition occurs to either a high-probability non-time-shortened state in the probability variable state and the non-time-shortened state, or a low-probability time-shortened state in the non-probability variable state and the time-shortened state, and the probability of transitioning to the high-probability non-time-shortened state in the probability variable state and the non-time-shortened state is higher than the probability of transitioning to the low-probability time-shortened state in the non-probability variable state and the time-shortened state,
The method further includes a counting means for storing a value obtained by adding up the number of times the first identification information and the second identification information change,
when the value of the counting means reaches a prescribed number of times, the game state control means transitions to a special time-saving state in which a displacement pattern for determining that the displacement member in the second state is to be displaced to the first state is longer than that in the non-time-saving state,
The specified number of times is a number that does not exceed the number of special time-saving times granted when the special time-saving state is transitioned to,
The special time-saving state is terminated when the value of the counting means after transition to the special time-saving state reaches the number of special time-saving plays.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2), the presentation control means displays a message indicating that the transition to the special time-saving state is approaching, and displays the number of times ...

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (3), when the stop mode when the second identification information changes and stops in the non-probability variable state and the non-time-saving state is a stop mode that transitions to the non-probability variable state and the time-saving state after the special game state ends, the number of time-saving times granted to the time-saving state is greater than the maximum number of time-saving times granted to the time-saving state when the stop mode when the first identification information changes and stops in the non-probability variable state and the non-time-saving state is a stop mode that transitions to the non-probability variable state and the time-saving state after the special game state ends.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (2) to (4), after the special game state ends, the machine transitions to the high probability state and the time-saving state, then transitions to the high probability state and the non-time-saving state, and then transitions to the non-high probability state and the special time-saving state.

(6) In any of (2) to (5), when the value of the counting means reaches a prescribed number of times, a table to be referred to in order to determine a variation pattern of the identification information at the prescribed number of times is switched;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means performs control to execute a specific presentation that notifies a player of a transition to the special time-saving state when the player transitions to the special time-saving state.

(7) In the gaming machine of any one of (2) to (6), the presentation control means performs control to execute a presentation that suggests, when the value of the counting means reaches a specified number of times, that the presentation is a presentation that suggests ...

(8) In any one of (2) to (7), a holding means is further provided for holding a predetermined number of the variable display of the identification information when the game medium passes through the first start area or the second start area while the identification information of at least one of the first identification information display means and the second identification information display means is being displayed variably,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when there is a hold in the hold means for which the value of the counting means reaches a specified number, the presentation control means reads ahead the hold and controls to execute a presentation that counts down in accordance with the hold that reaches the specified number.

(9) In the gaming machine of any one of (2) to (8), the presentation control means controls the execution of a presentation that notifies the player of the number of times the game will change until the game transitions to the special time-saving state only when a specific presentation is executed.

(10) In the above (2) to (9), the special game state includes a small win game state in which a predetermined game that can give a player an advantage can be played, and a plurality of kinds of big win game states in which the predetermined game can be played multiple times repeatedly,
The value of the counting means is reset when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state,
The jackpot game state includes a special jackpot game state that performs the same operation as the small jackpot game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means controls the execution of a presentation that notifies the player whether or not the value of the counting means is reset when transitioning to the small win game state and the special big win game state.

According to the present invention, when a transition is made to a special game state in a normal state, a transition is made to a high probability non-time-saving state (latent probability change state) or a low probability time-saving state after the special game state ends. Here, in a high probability non-time-saving state (latent probability change state), the shifting means is unlikely to shift to the first state, so the identification information is unlikely to fluctuate, and it is easy to transition to the special game state, so the counting means is unlikely to reach the specified number of times. On the other hand, in a low probability time-saving state, the shifting means is likely to shift to the first state, so the identification information is likely to fluctuate, and it is difficult to transition to the special game state, so the counting means is likely to reach the specified number of times, and the possibility of transitioning to the special time-saving state increases. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of times the identification information changes in a short period of time in an advantageous game state such as a low probability time-saving state, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can give new interest to players by bringing them closer to the transition to the special time-saving state.

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can provide new entertainment to players in favorable gaming conditions.

[Appendix 4]
Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and variably displays a pattern based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating a specific result, the gaming machine is controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, there is a gaming machine that has advantageous gaming states including a big win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a big win, and a small win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a small win and is less profitable for the player than the big win gaming state.

In recent years, gaming machines of this type have been introduced that are equipped with a favorable gaming state in which the time for which the above-mentioned symbols are displayed is shortened (time-saving state), and a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby granting the player a predetermined benefit (for example, JP 2019-76136 A).

However, the aim is to provide new excitement to players with gaming machines equipped with advantageous gaming state functions.

(1) a game board having a game area in which a game medium can roll;
A starting area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A jackpot game state transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a jackpot game state advantageous to a player occurs when the game medium passes through the starting area;
A display means for displaying the result of the judgment by the jackpot game state transition judgment means by changing and stopping the identification information;
A favorable game state control means capable of controlling the identification information display means to a favorable game state in which the identification information is likely to be stopped in a stopping state in which the identification information display means notifies a positive determination;
A non-advantageous game state control means capable of controlling the identification information display means to a non-advantageous game state in which it is difficult to stop the identification information in a stop mode in which the identification information display means notifies a positive determination;
A counting means for storing the number of times the identification information has changed;
A passage area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
a movable displacement member that is displaceable between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium, and that guides the captured game medium to the starting area;
a displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the movable displacement member from the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the passage area;
A game state control means for switching a game state according to a stop display mode of the identification information;
A performance display means for performing various performance displays;
A performance control means for controlling the performance display means to execute various performance displays;
A launching means for launching a game medium toward the game area;
Equipped with
The advantageous state control means
a probability variable game state control means for controlling a probability variable game state in which the probability of the identification information display means stopping and displaying the identification information in a jackpot mode is relatively high after the jackpot game state to which the game state control means controls is ended;
a non-variable probability game state control means for controlling a non-variable probability game state in which the probability of the identification information being stopped and displayed in a jackpot state on the identification information display means is relatively low after the jackpot game state to which the jackpot game state to which the jackpot game state is shifted under the control of the game state control means is ended;
and a time-saving game state control means capable of controlling the movable displacement member to a time-saving game state including a state in which the movable displacement member is relatively likely to be in a first state after the end of the jackpot game state to which the movable displacement member is relatively likely to be in a first state.
The non-advantageous state control means
a non-time-saving game state control means for controlling the movable displacement member to a non-time-saving game state including a state in which it is relatively difficult for the movable displacement member to be in the first state when the number of times that the identification information has been variably displayed since the time-saving game state control means controlled the movable displacement member to be in the time-saving game state reaches a time-saving number;
The initiation region includes a first initiation region and a second initiation region,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the identification information display means has a first identification information display means for notifying the result of a determination as to whether or not a transition to the jackpot game state will occur, which is triggered by the passing of the game medium into the first starting area, by changing and stopping a first identification information, and a second identification information display means for notifying the result of a determination as to whether or not a transition to the jackpot game state will occur, which is triggered by the passing of the game medium into the second starting area, by changing and stopping a second identification information.

(2) In (1), a limit number control means for transitioning to the non-advantageous game state when the number of times the advantageous game state and the jackpot game state alternately transition reaches a limit number;
A gaming machine further comprising a limiter number setting means for setting the limiter number from a plurality of numbers when the non-advantageous gaming state is transitioned to the jackpot gaming state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2), the limiter number setting means sets the limiter number based on the jackpot type.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) and (3), the presentation control means controls the execution of a promotion presentation that notifies the player of the limiter number of times after the end of the non-variable play state and the jackpot play state to which the player has transitioned from the non-time-saving play state.

(5) In the above (1) to (4), a specific identification information display means notifies the result of the determination by the displacement determination means by changing or stopping the specific identification information;
and a special time-saving game state control means for controlling the movable displacement member in the second state to the first state in an average time shorter than that in a non-time-saving state when the value of the counting means reaches a specified number of times.

(6) In (5), the jackpot game state includes a special jackpot game state in which the jackpot game state is a short-term game state and the game state is changed to the non-variable game state and the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance control means controls the performance display means to vary and stop the performance identification information corresponding to the identification information, and controls the display of a common special pattern as the stopping mode of the performance identification information when transitioning to the special jackpot game state and when transitioning to the special time-saving game state.

(7) In any one of (1) to (6), a gaming machine is characterized in that the first area includes the first starting area, the second starting area, and a movable member that passes the gaming ball through the second starting area at regular time intervals.

(8) In any one of (1) to (7), a small win game state transition determination means is further provided for determining whether or not a transition to a small win game state that is advantageous to a player and less advantageous than the big win game state is to occur when a game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area;
The first identification information display means notifies the result of the determination of the small win game state triggered by the passage of the game medium into the first starting area by changing and stopping the first identification information,
The second identification information display means notifies the result of the judgment of the small win game state triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area by a second identification information display means for notifying ...
A gaming machine characterized in that the first identification information and the second identification information are capable of changing simultaneously, and a change time of the second identification information is longer than a change time of the first identification information.

(9) In any one of (1) to (7), a small win game state transition determination means is further provided for determining whether or not a transition to a small win game state that is advantageous to a player and less advantageous than the big win game state is to occur when a game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area,
The first starting region is disposed in the first region;
The passing region, the movable displacement member, and the second starting region are disposed in the second region;
The second identification information display means displays the stop pattern of the second identification information in a small win pattern that notifies a transition to the small win gaming state with a high probability.

(10) In (5) and (6), the special time-saving state is substantially the same as the non-variable game state and the non-time-saving game state;
The gaming machine is characterized in that there is a difference between the number of time-saving times granted after a transition from the special time-saving state to the big win game state and the number of time-saving times granted after a transition from the non-variable game state and the non-time-saving game state to the big win game state.

(11) In the above (5), (6), and (10), a small win game state transition determination means is further provided for determining whether or not a transition to a small win game state that is advantageous to a player and less advantageous than the big win game state is to occur when the game medium passes through the starting area,
The special time-saving state is of multiple types,
The identification information display means is capable of notifying a result of the judgment by the small win game state transition judgment means triggered by the passage of the game medium into the starting area by fluctuation and stop of the identification information,
A gaming machine characterized in that the special time-saving state after reaching the specified number of times is different when the stopping pattern of the identification information displayed by the identification information display means is a small win pattern indicating a transition to the small win game state and a miss pattern indicating no transition to either the big win game state or the small win game state.

(12) In the gaming machine of (5), (6), (10), or (11), the counting means does not count during the high probability game state.

(13) In the above (5), (6), and (10) to (12), the identification information display means displays the stop pattern of the identification information in a jackpot pattern that notifies a transition to a jackpot gaming state with a high probability,
After the end of the jackpot game state, the game state transitions to either the probability variable game state and the non-time-saving game state, or the non-probability variable game state and the time-saving game state, and a high rate of transition to the probability variable game state and the non-time-saving game state is set;
The specified number of times is set to the number of time-saving times that is awarded when the game state is shifted to the time-saving game state.

According to the present invention, when the number of times that the advantageous game state (probability change game state or time-limited game state) and the jackpot game state alternately shift reaches the limiter number, the game state shifts to a non-advantageous game state (non-probability change game state or non-time-limited game state), and when the game state shifts from the non-advantageous game state to the jackpot game state, the limiter number is set from among a plurality of numbers. Therefore, since two or more types of limiter number can be set, for example, when the number of times that the advantageous game state (probability change game state) and the jackpot game state alternately shift reaches the limiter number, when the game state shifts to a non-advantageous game state (time-limited game state), it is possible to switch the limiter number based on the number of times that the identification information changes in the non-advantageous game state (time-limited game state). In this way, it is possible to provide new interest to players with a gaming machine equipped with a limiter.

The gaming machine described above, which is equipped with a function for creating an advantageous gaming state, can provide new excitement to players.

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and variably displays a pattern based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating a specific result, the gaming machine is controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, there is a gaming machine that has advantageous gaming states including a big win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a big win, and a small win gaming state that is controlled when the specific result is a small win and is less profitable for the player than the big win gaming state.

In addition, in recent years, gaming machines of this type have been introduced that are equipped with a favorable gaming state in which the time for which the above-mentioned symbols are displayed is shortened (time-saving state), and a specific result frequently results in a small win, thereby granting the player a predetermined benefit (for example, JP 2019-76136 A).

However, even in gaming machines that offer advantageous game states, there is a demand for greater entertainment value.

The purpose of the gaming machine described below is to solve these problems and provide a gaming machine equipped with features that create an advantageous gaming state that is highly interesting for players.

(1) a game board having a game area in which a game medium can roll;
A first starting area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A second starting area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state advantageous to a player occurs when a game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area;
a first identification information display means for notifying a result of the determination made by the special game state transition determination means when the game medium passes through the first starting area by changing and stopping a first identification information;
A second identification information display means for notifying a result of the determination made by the special game state transition determination means triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area by changing and stopping the second identification information;
A passage area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
a displacement member that is displaceable between a first state in which it is easy to capture the game medium and a second state in which it is difficult to capture the game medium;
a displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member from the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the passage area;
a specific identification information display means for notifying a result of the determination by the displacement determination means by changing or stopping the specific identification information;
A game state control means for controlling a game state;
A performance display means for performing various performance displays;
A performance control means for controlling the performance display means to execute various performance displays;
Equipped with
the special gaming state includes a first gaming state in which a predetermined game that can provide a player with an advantage can be executed, and a second gaming state in which the predetermined game can be executed repeatedly a plurality of times;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means performs presentation control related to the variation of the first identification information in a normal state.

(2) In the method according to (1), the first identification information and the second identification information can be changed simultaneously,
the game state control means, when a value obtained by adding up the number of times the first identification information and the second identification information change reaches a prescribed number of times, transitions to a special time-saving state in which a change time of the specific identification information is made shorter than that in a normal state;
A variable time for notifying a loss determination that does not shift to a special game state and a first winning determination that shifts to the first game state in the first identification information and the second identification information is longer than a variable time for notifying a second winning determination that shifts to a second game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when either the first identification information display means or the second identification information display means stops in a first win stop mode that notifies a first win judgment, the other is stopped in a loss stop mode that notifies a loss judgment, and, when either one is stopped in a second win stop mode that notifies a second win judgment, the other is stopped in a loss stop mode that notifies a loss judgment.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2), the presentation control means does not perform a presentation related to the fluctuation of the second identification information in a normal state, and does not output the number of times the second identification information has fluctuated to the outside.

(4) In the gaming machine of any one of (1) to (3), the presentation control means controls presentation to display the number of times the first identification information changes on the presentation display means.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4), the presentation control means performs a presentation indicating the number of fluctuations until the special time-saving state is reached.

(6) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (5), the first identification information and the second identification information can change simultaneously in the special time-saving state, and the change of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is stopped in a first winning stop mode, thereby stopping the change of the other in a losing stop mode.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6), even if the special game state transition determination means corresponding to the other variation determines that the game state should be transitioned to the second game state, the other variation is stopped in a miss stop mode.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (7), the change time in the special time-saving state that results in the second winning stop mode is shorter than the change time in the loss stop mode and the first winning stop mode.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8), the change time during which the first identification information and the second identification information become the losing stop mode and the first winning stop mode is shorter than the change time during which the second winning stop mode is become the second winning stop mode.

(10) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (9), when the first identification information and the second identification information, which are both fluctuating at the same time, indicate that the special game state transition determination means has determined that a transition to the second game state will occur, the identification information that is to be stopped first in the program regardless of the fluctuating time is stopped in a second winning manner.

(11) In the gaming machine described in (1) to (10), when the first identification information and the second identification information, which are fluctuating simultaneously, both notify that the special game state transition determination means has determined that a transition to the first game state will occur, the identification information that is to be stopped first in the program regardless of the fluctuating time is stopped in a first winning mode.

According to the present invention, when the sum of the number of times the first identification information and the second identification information change reaches a specified number of times, a transition to a special time-saving state (ceiling time-saving) occurs. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information can change simultaneously, and the changes in the first identification information and the second identification information are consumed in parallel, which promotes reaching the specified number of times. Also, in the normal state, a presentation related to the change in the first identification information is performed, and for example, by displaying the number of times the first identification information changes, it becomes possible to guess the number of times remaining until the specified number is reached, and a gaming machine can be provided that realizes a presentation display of the number of changes that is highly interesting to the player.

The above gaming machine makes it possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a function that creates an advantageous gaming state that is highly interesting to players.

7, 1007, 2007, 3007, 4007 Display device 10, 1010, 2010, 3010, 4010 Game board unit 106, 1106, 2106, 3106, 4106 Left side area 107, 1107, 2107, 3107, 4107 Right side area 120, 1120, 2120, 3120, 4120 First start gate 126, 1126, 2126, 3126, 4126 Passing gate 131, 1131, 2131, 3131, 4131 Big winning entrance 140, 1140, 2140, 3140, 4140 Second start gate 146, 1146, 2146, 3146, 4146 Ordinary electric role 151, 1151 Small prize winning slot 185 Rotating device 201, 1201, 2201, 3201, 4201 Main CPU
163, 1163, 2163, 3163, 4163 First special symbol display unit 164, 1164, 2164, 3164, 4164 Second special symbol display unit 301, 1301, 2301, 3301, 4301 Sub-CPU
3124 Kroon unit 3210 Kroon plate 3220 Normal start port 3506 Distributor 3511 First operating mechanism 3513 Second operating mechanism 3440 First non-electric device 3441 Second non-electric device

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which a game medium can roll;
A selection area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A first starting area disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A second starting area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
A special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not a transition to a special game state advantageous to a player occurs when a game medium passes through either the first starting area or the second starting area;
a special game display means for displaying a result of the determination by the special game state transition determination means by changing and stopping the indicator;
a game state control means for switching a game state according to a stop display mode of the identification information display means;
A predetermined passage area that is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass;
a displacement member that is displaceable between a first state and a second state in which guiding the game medium is more difficult than in the first state;
a displacement determination means for determining whether or not to displace the displacement member from the second state to the first state when the game medium passes through the predetermined passing area;
A specific passing area is disposed in the game area and through which the game medium can pass.
the selection area is capable of passing the game medium that has passed through the specific passing area to any one of a plurality of areas through which game media pass, including the first starting area and the predetermined passing area;
the special game state includes a first game state that is controllable so that a player is likely to be provided with a benefit for a predetermined time period, and a second game state that is controllable so that a player is likely to be provided with a benefit for a time period longer than the predetermined time period;
the special game state transition determination means is more likely to determine that a transition to the first game state will occur upon the game medium passing through the second starting area than to determine that a transition to the first game state will occur upon the game medium passing through the first starting area;
the second starting region is capable of passing the game medium when the game medium is guided by the displacement member being displaced to the first state,
the displacement member is capable of operating in a predetermined displacement pattern when the displacement determination means determines that the displacement member is to be displaced to the first state,
During a period during which operation according to the predetermined displacement pattern is possible, the second state can be maintained for a longer time than the first state, an operation of changing from the second state to the first state can be executed a plurality of times, the displacement member can be controlled to be in the first state for a period during which at least one game medium can be guided when the operation is executed once, and the specific game triggered by the passage of a game medium into the second starting area can be executed a predetermined number of times when the operation is executed a plurality of times,
When the specific game triggered by the passage of the game medium into the second starting area is played the specified number of times during a period during which an action according to the specified displacement pattern is possible, when the identification information stops in the specific game for the specified number of times, it is possible to indicate the end of the period during which an action according to the specified displacement pattern is possible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images